JP2022125306A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.

SOLUTION: A game machine 10 can set a jackpot probability in which a jackpot lottery results in a jackpot from among a plurality of mutually different jackpot probabilities, and can display the set jackpot probability (game setting value) on a 7-segment display part 39. Display contents regarding a jackpot probability on the 7-segment display part 39 are controlled based on a predetermined control order pattern according to the number of game balls (the number of special out balls) entering a special out ball port 373 from beginning of a jackpot game to initial winning or an opening/closing execution mode to completion of the opening/closing execution mode.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have a plurality of game setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in a jackpot lottery.

JP-A-2000-024234

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to raise the level of attention and interest in the game to increase the player's willingness to play.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period;
with
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The profit information display means (39, 341) is characterized by having a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening/closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4; The figure which shows an example of the opening-and-closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. The perspective view of a croon apparatus. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6; A diagram for explaining a predetermined period of time in which the game ball is retained in the game ball retention portion. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 section line of FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10(B) and 10(C) are cross-sectional views along the X3-X3 section line of FIG. FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between game setting values and display examples of the 7-segment display. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of a main controller. The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device; The figure which shows the example of a display in the game setting value display part of a performance information display apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 20; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a first pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of FIG. 21; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game set value change processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28; FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 33; FIG. 35. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st stop design selection table and a variation classification table which are used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 35; FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of a game set value display process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 35; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in the game set value display process of FIG. 38; FIG. FIG. 40(A) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the lit state or extinguished state of each segment in the 7-segment display section and the display numerical value, and FIGS. 40(B) and 40(C) are the 7-segment display section control The figure which shows an example of the control order pattern classification selection table used by a process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; A flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game set value display processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the game set value display process; FIG. 45(A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between alphabets and game setting values displayed on the 7-segment display section of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The figure which shows the correspondence of the lighting or light extinction state of each segment, and a display alphabet. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of a control order pattern type selection table used in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. 39; FIG. 47(A) is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen in a jackpot game in a gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. and display parts). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between game setting values and face images displaying game setting values; The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of the game setting value display face image. The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of the game setting value display face image. The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of the game setting value display face image. The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of the game setting value display face image. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game set value display processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of face image display processing executed in the game set value display processing of FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 55(A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in a modified example of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55(B) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between game setting values and game setting value images. FIG. 56(A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in a modified example of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56(B) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between game setting values and setting images. FIG. 57(A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in a jackpot game in a gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. A diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship)). The figure which shows an example of the deletion pattern of a game setting value image. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game set value display processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game set value image display processing in the game set value display processing of FIG. 59; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the expected ball payout value and the face image of the expected ball payout value in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device; FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of expected ball output display processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 62; FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a face image display process procedure in the payout expected value display process of FIG. 62;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, first to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for better understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment shall be defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine. The present invention can also be applied to game machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported by the front frame 11 at its left end. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination portion 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the button is pressed. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 . This operation button 20 is executed by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined specific period in the variable game performance executed in the variable game that clearly indicates the lottery result of the big win lottery to the player. It is operated to execute operation button effects and the like.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

Also, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button presentation or the like in the variable game presentation.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the shooting handle 22, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in a row. It is used to lead to the game ball launching mechanism 32 . Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect of outputting audio. In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the illumination section 27 incorporates a light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and performs lamp effects according to a lighting color and a blinking mode such as lighting or extinguishing.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332 . In the game machine 10 , a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, and an out port 318. , a variable display unit 34, a crew device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being shot from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. be done.

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 includes a shooting rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 . In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 4 , the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 are formed with openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. And on the back side of the game board 31, corresponding to each of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected. Entering ball sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the out port 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, and are detected by an out ball sensor 35, which will be described later. (see FIG. 12). Also, the variable prize winning port 316 is provided in the right central portion of the game board 31, and a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter. A game ball that has passed through the opening 35 of the variable winning port 316 is guided to the crew device 37 by a guide path 316c (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and has an entrance ball sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gate 317. FIG. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board 31 passes through the through gate 317, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 317 is detected, the second winning hole is opened. A lottery per normal pattern is executed as to whether or not to open 315.

The incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35 and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35 and the special out ball sensor A detection result of the ball sensor 384 is input to the main control unit 331 . The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a. Detecting the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a is hereinafter sometimes referred to as winning. Also, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 ) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 35 . The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of shot game balls shot onto the game board 31 by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 .

Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) detects that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, which will be described later. A special out-ball detection command shown in FIG. As a result, the sound ramp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

The incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out-ball sensor 35 and the special out-ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls by other detection methods. Any sensor may be used.

In addition, the second prize winning port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not to restrict entry of game balls into the second prize winning port 315 . The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. In the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 315, and the electric accessory 315b is closed to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 315. ball is restricted.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 for switching whether or not the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 . On the game board 31, opening the opening/closing door 319 enables game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and closing the opening/closing door 319 restricts entry of the game ball to the variable winning opening 316. be. The open/close door 319 is moved to a position to open the variable winning opening 316 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and otherwise waits at a position to close the variable winning opening 316 . As a result, the game ball 99 launched into the right area of the game board 31 in the round game of the jackpot game can enter the variable winning hole 316 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of mounting portions 319d for rotatably mounting the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and projects slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. . Thereby, the opening/closing door 319 can receive the game balls 99 released from the first passage 374 and the second passage 375 of the sorting device 37, which will be described later, when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. A pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a to prevent game balls 99 received by the base 319a from falling from the left and right of the base 319a. Also, the pair of guides 319 c guides the game ball 99 received by the base 319 a to the variable winning opening 316 . A pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. In addition, the variable prize winning port 316 has a through portion 316b for discharging the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The through portion 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The guideway 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 is entered into the variable winning opening 316 and guided to the crew device 37 through the through portion 316b and the guide path 316c. The guideway 316c is provided with the ball entry sensor 316a described above. As a result, the game ball 99 entered into the variable winning hole 316 is detected when it passes through the penetrating portion 316b and is introduced into the guideway 316c.

In the gaming machine 10, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery when the entry of a game ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 37 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Also, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the game ball entering the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315 is 3, and the ball enters the variable prize opening 316. The number of prize balls in this case is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the state shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and the variable winning port 316 is opened. ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. When the result of the lottery is winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes the 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and the 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, the round game (unit game) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or the game balls of the upper limit number (for example, 9) or more wins in the variable winning opening 316 is performed five times. It is a game state including the opening and closing execution mode that is performed. The 16R variable jackpot game state is a game state including an opening and closing execution mode in which round games (unit games) are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, and more than in the 5R jackpot game state. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and variation game according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 Various displays such as dramatic displays are performed. The pattern display section 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention. Also, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in the vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the main designs. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variation game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time elapses from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols are varied along a preset variation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of a plurality of main symbols is stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols on all the lines stops and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 ends, the symbol display section 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged on one or a plurality of active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol indicates or suggests the lottery result of the big win lottery by the main control unit 331. - 特許庁For example, if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the state where the main patterns of the same pattern are lined up on the effective line is displayed, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. In addition, although the jackpot type may be indicated by the combination of main symbols on the activated line, it is not necessarily indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable big hit", the state where the symbol combination of "777", for example, which is set as the symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable big hit among the main symbols, is lined up on the effective line. is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than "777" are lined up on the activated line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit", a state in which the symbol combination such as "333", for example, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating the 5R probability variation big hit among the main symbols, is lined up on the effective line is displayed. Alternatively, a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than a combination of symbols indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot such as "777" or "333" are lined up on an active line is displayed. In addition, if the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", other than the combination of symbols such as "222" and "444", which are set in advance as a pattern combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main patterns, indicating a probability variable jackpot A state in which combinations of the same symbols are lined up on the active line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on the activated line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

Also, in the symbol display section 341, along with the variation display of the main symbols in the variation game, a variation game effect is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. In addition, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", when a state is displayed in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line, the 5R probability variable jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestive effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the big win game effect, promotion effect is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable big win. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", when a state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the main pattern combination indicating the probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the In this case, in the jackpot game production, a promotion production or the like is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect and an ending effect.

A sub image display section 38 such as a liquid crystal display is provided in the front left area of the pattern display section 341 . In this sub-image display section 38, a game effect is executed together with the symbol display section 341 in a variation game or a jackpot game. Also, in the sub-image display section 38, an effect is executed to suggest to the player information (performance information) relating to ball payout performance in a variation game or a jackpot game. Details of the performance information will be described later, but this performance information includes, for example, game setting values, unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, consecutive role ratio information, role ratio information, and the like. The sub-image display section 38 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display.

Also, the game board 31 may be provided with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensors are provided around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316, for example. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316, the fraud can be detected. On the other hand, radio wave sensors are provided around the first prize winning port 314 and the second prize winning port 315, for example. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the entering ball sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entering of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4, the crew device 37 directs the game ball entered into the variable winning hole 316 to either a normal out ball hole 378 or a special out ball hole 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8), which will be described later. It is a distribution. Here, FIG. 6 is a view showing an example of the opening/closing door 319, the cloon device 37 and the game ball retention portion 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the cloon device 37, and FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the croon device 37 is dish-shaped having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371 . The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view, and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and an inclined portion 371c that slopes downward to the left and is provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes the right portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. A special out-ball passage 374 having a special out-ball mouth 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 371a. The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the central portion of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99 . A first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374 . This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention portion 38 . The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375 a and a lower opening 375 b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374 . The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game ball 99 of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention portion 38 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374. On the other hand, the game ball retention portion 38 has a retention lane 381 inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right portion (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention portion 38 . The game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 does not enter the various prize winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317 . Therefore, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is not expected to enter the various winning holes 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it passes through the special out ball mouth 373, or When introduced into the out ball passage 374, it is treated as an out ball.

The low bottom portion 371b constitutes the left portion of the bottom wall 371 and slopes downward toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal out ball mouth 378 is provided in the lower bottom portion 371b. The normal passage 376 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 of the low bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 entered through the normal out ball opening 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 373. is formed in A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376 . This second guide member 377 gathers the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 to the back side of the game board 31 in the same way as the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318 . The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

The game ball 99 that is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 as described above is guided to the croon device 37 through the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided to the croon device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372 . As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 is delayed in the croon device 37 . Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371, for example, because their kinetic energy is reduced, or collide with the peripheral wall 372 of the croon device 37 or other game balls 99, are usually out balls. Enter 378. A game ball 99 entering the normal out ball opening 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position detectable by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, some of the game balls that move on the bottom wall 371, for example, about 0.5% to 1% (1 to 2 in a 16R round game (about 1 per 10R in a round game)) ), the moving direction is changed due to collision with the periphery of the normal out ball 378 or other game balls, etc., and the ball enters the special out ball 373 . A game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 is released toward the game ball retention portion 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375 .

In this embodiment, the special out ball 373 is provided on the high bottom portion 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball 373. is markedly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball opening 378, but instead of or in addition to all or part of these, the game ball is inserted into the special out ball opening 373 by other means. It is also conceivable that 99 will make it difficult to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide an inhibition means for inhibiting entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball 373 in the peripheral portion of the special out ball 373 . As the obstruction means, for example, an obstacle such as a wall surrounding the special out ball 373 that hinders the entry of the ball into the special out ball 373, a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the peripheral part of the special out ball 373. Means for generating a force, and means for forming an air curtain by blowing air around the special out ball mouth 373 are conceivable.

Further, an opening/closing part for opening/closing the special out ball 373 may be provided, and the opening/closing part may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball 373 . In this case, the special out ball 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball 378, and the normal out ball 378 is formed to have the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out ball 373. good too.

Further, the means for distributing the game balls 99 entering the variable winning hole 316 to the normal out ball hole 378 and the special out ball hole 373 is not limited to the crew device 37, and other means may be used. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotating member, or a nail driven into the game board 31, it may be divided into the normal out ball 378 and the special out ball 373. .

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retention unit 38 receives the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 and retains the game ball 99 until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. is. Here, FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined period of time during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention portion 38. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period of time is from the start of a jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low-probability mode becomes a jackpot. This is the period until the run mode ends (the ending starts). For example, as shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot (first hit) in the low probability mode is (5R) normal jackpot, the predetermined period is from the start of the normal jackpot game (opening) to opening and closing execution Until the mode ends (ending starts). That is, when the first win is a normal jackpot, a predetermined period is set in the normal jackpot game. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when the jackpot (first hit) in the low probability mode is a variable jackpot, the predetermined period is from the start of the variable jackpot game (opening) for the first hit, with a high probability It is a period until the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the mode ends (ending starts). In other words, when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot, a predetermined period is set across the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode from the start of the first jackpot game, and during the jackpot series (in the time reduction mode ) continues for a predetermined period.

By the way, game setting values are displayed in the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later. In this 7-segment display section 39, the number of segments A to G corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 (the number satisfying a specific condition) is lit or extinguished. is controlled by Here, the game ball 99 can enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in the jackpot game, but the game ball 99 is made difficult to enter the special out ball mouth 373 . For example, about 0.5% to 1% of the game balls 99 guided to the crew device 37 (1 to 2 in a 16R round game (about 1 in 10R minutes of a round game)). Therefore, if the period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 is limited to the execution period of one jackpot gaming machine, the number of segments A to G to be controlled in the 7-segment display section 39 is reduced. , it becomes difficult not only to grasp the game set values, but also to guess the game set values.

On the other hand, by setting the predetermined period for retaining the game balls in the game ball retention portion 38 from the first hit to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot, when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot, the first jackpot is set. From the start of the game, a predetermined period is set over the normal big win game for the normal big win in the high-probability mode, and the predetermined period continues during the big win consecutive games (except for the pullback in the time reduction mode). As a result, it is expected that more game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crun device 37 and stay in the game ball retention portion 38 by winning the probability variable jackpot continuously. Therefore, it is expected that the number of segments to be controlled for lighting or extinguishing in the 7-segment display unit 39 increases as the probability variable jackpot continues, so there is a possibility that the game setting value can be confirmed or the game setting value is increased. It is very likely that you will be able to guess correctly. As a result, the player not only enjoys the game in anticipation of a succession of variable probability big wins from the aspect of ball output, but also expects a succession of probability variable big wins for guessing or grasping the game setting value. You can enjoy playing games.

Also, when a jackpot game is started, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there are special circumstances, and the game is not ended during the high probability mode when the high probability mode is set. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the first winning jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even if a player who does not know the timing (the end of the predetermined period) at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized progresses the game, the game can be played immediately before the game set value can be estimated or recognized. is prevented from terminating. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized can estimate or recognize the game set value. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play games aiming at timings at which game set values can be guessed or recognized.

In addition, in this embodiment, a 5R variable probability jackpot and a 16R variable probability jackpot with different numbers of rounds are set as the variable probability jackpot. In this way, when a plurality of variable probability jackpots with different numbers of rounds (expected ball output) are set, the player expects that the variable probability jackpots with a large number of rounds (expected ball output) will continue. The degree of disappointment in the case of a probability variable jackpot with a small (expected ball output) is large. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it can be expected that the game ball will enter the special out ball opening 373 even if it is a probability variable jackpot with a small number of rounds (expected ball output value), and the game ball retention part 38 The degree of disappointment in the case of a probability variable jackpot with a small number of rounds (expected ball output) by increasing the possibility of estimating or grasping the game set value by continuing the predetermined period of time in which the game ball stays can be reduced.

The start of the predetermined period may be the time when the opening/closing execution mode for the first win is started (the opening for the first win is finished). On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the jackpot game for the normal jackpot ends (the ending with the jackpot ends), or the time when the time saving mode shifted after the normal jackpot ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, although the description is based on the premise of a loop variable machine, in other forms of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and one and two types of mixing machines, the predetermined period according to the aspect can also be set. For example, in the V-ST machine, if there is no V prize in the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same way as in the case of the normal jackpot of the loop variable machine, and if there is a V prize in the first hit (variable jackpot ), the start of the first jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode is the start of a predetermined period, and the end of the opening/closing execution mode with a big win without V prizes, or the end of a specified number of jackpot lotteries in a high-probability mode, etc. It is conceivable that it is the end of the predetermined period.

It is also conceivable to set the predetermined period regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of specific conditions, and the period of staying in the normal game state (period from the end of the time saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), staying in the time saving mode Period (period from the end of normal jackpot to normal game state), period to stay in low probability mode (period from the end of normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), high probability Period until receiving a predetermined number of jackpot lotteries in one or both of mode and low probability mode, period until receiving a predetermined number of lotteries per normal drawing in one or both of high probability mode and low probability mode, high probability mode and A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the general winning port 313 in one or both of the low probability modes, and a predetermined number of game balls in the first winning port 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The period until 99 is won, the period until the predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the second winning port 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, one of the high probability mode and the low probability mode Or a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in both, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are launched onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, etc. mentioned. Also, depending on the type of specific condition, it is conceivable to set the start time of the predetermined period when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Also, depending on the type of specific condition, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

In addition, when the specific condition is set regardless of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot game, or regardless of the transition of the game state, the game ball is entered into the special out ball mouth 373. is set as a condition for For example, the specific condition may be that the game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball mouth 373 in the game area set on the game board 31 . Specifically, the specific conditions are that a specific number of game balls 99 are won in the general winning hole 313, that a specific number of game balls 99 are won in the first winning hole 314, and that the second winning hole 315 It may be that a specific number of game balls 99 win a prize, that a specific number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317, or the like.

In addition, other examples of specific conditions include obtaining a specific number of game balls (out balls) in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode Acquisition of a specific number of difference balls (including minus difference balls), occurrence of a series of reserved jackpots, execution of a specific effect in a variation game or jackpot game, and the like can be mentioned.

Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 section line of FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B is a section along the X3-X3 section line of FIG. FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view taken along line X3-X3 in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6, 8 and 10, the game ball retention section 38 includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382 and a stopper section 383. As shown in FIG.

The staying lane 381 receives the game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The stay lane 381 is open at the top and slopes downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a portion of the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). Thereby, the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 within a predetermined period can be grasped. In addition, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently with resin or the like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 . Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 visible, the number of the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be displayed. The display of the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be, for example, the number of lamps lit up, image display in the symbol display section 341, or the like.

The discharge lane 382 continues to the left end of the staying lane 381, and guides the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 to a predetermined position, for example, a position detectable by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

A special out-ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382 . This special out ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves through the discharge lane 382 . That is, the special out ball sensor 384 counts the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within a predetermined period. used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out-ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the output from the special out-ball sensor 384 is monitored by the MPU 41 so that the MPU 41 It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has moved through the discharge lane 382 . Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and outputs this special out-ball detection command to the external output of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 5 in processing. On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls, and based on the number of special out balls and the game setting value, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays Control what is displayed.

As the special out ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Also, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the audio ramp control device 5 . In this case, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 does not set the special out ball detection command, but the sound lamp controller 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384 .

The stopper part 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between the upper limit position and the lower limit position by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. . The upper limit position is a position where the tip portion protrudes upward, and the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 by the stopper portion 383 being at the upper limit position (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip portion does not protrude upward, and the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 can be discharged through the discharge lane 382 by the stopper portion 383 being at the lower limit position (Fig. 10(A)). The game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position detectable by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

The means for enabling the game balls 99 to stay in the staying lane 381 and discharging the game balls 99 in the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the vertically movable stopper portion 383. Other means such as a stopper portion that can be rotated between the upright state and the prone state may also be used. In addition, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be ejected by canceling the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. . Furthermore, by making the retention lane 381 vertically movable, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which the game ball 99 is discharged. For example, by making the stay lane 381 stand by at a lower position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are retained, and by moving the stay lane 381 to a higher position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are moved to the discharge lane 382. may be configured to shift to. In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening from which the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31, and a position where the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 and the game board 31 from the opening. The retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between a position at which it can be discharged to the rear side of the . Also, by moving a box-shaped movable body instead of the retention lane 381, a state in which the game ball 99 can be retained in the movable body and a state in which the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 are realized. It is also possible.

Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;

As shown in FIG. 11A, the 7-segment display section 39 consists of 7 segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually. The 7-segment display unit 39 displays the game set values stored in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 by turning on or off the number of segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 . It becomes a control target for turning off. In other words, in the 7-segment display section 39, the game set values are displayed up to stages according to the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373. FIG. In the 7-segment display unit 39, since numbers can be displayed by the 7 segments A to G, the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is 7 or more. In this case, a number indicating the game setting value is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11(B), when the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is seven or more, when the game set value is 1, The number 1 is displayed by lighting the segments B and C, and when the game setting value is 2, the number 2 is displayed by lighting the segments A, B, D, E and G, and the game is set. When the value is 3, segments A to D and G are lit to display the number 3, and when the game setting value is 4, segments B, C, F and G are lit to display the number 4. is displayed, and when the game setting value is 5, the segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit to display the number 5, and when the game setting value is 6, the segments A, C to G are displayed. The number 6 is displayed by being lit.

In addition, when the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 exceeds seven, the lighting state of the 7-segment display section 39 is changed to seven special out balls. Although it may be the same as in the case of , for more than 7 segments, performance information related to ball payout performance other than the game setting value is displayed, for example, by changing the color of the lit segment or lighting it in a predetermined pattern. It can also be suggested or specified. In this case, when the number of special out balls exceeds seven, it becomes possible not only to recognize the game set value but also to guess or recognize other performance information. As a result, when more than seven game balls 99 are entered into the special out ball opening 373, the game balls 99 exceeding seven are not wasted, and not only the game set value but also other It becomes possible to provide a playability that allows performance information to be guessed or recognized.

Here, segment A can be lit when the game set value is 2, 3, 5 or 6. Therefore, when the segment A is lit, it can be determined that the game set value is one of 2, 3, 5 and 6, and when the segment A is not lit as a control target, the game set value is 1 and 6. 4 (see FIG. 40(A)). That is, when the segment A is lit, the game set value 1, which is the most unfavorable to the player, is denied, leaving the possibility that the game set values 5 and 6 are advantageous to the player. Conversely, if segment A is not lit as a control target, there remains the possibility that the game set value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, when the segment A is lit, the game set value 1 is negated, leaving the possibility of the game set values 5 and 6. Therefore, the possibility that the game set values are advantageous to the player is relatively low. get higher

Segment B can be lit when the game setting is 1, 2, 3 or 4. Therefore, when the segment B is lit, it can be determined that the game set value is one of 1, 2, 3 and 4, and when the segment B is not lit as a control target, the game set value is 5 and 4. 6 (see FIG. 40(A)). That is, when the segment B is not lit, it is determined that the game set value is 5 or 6, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, whether or not the segment B is lit is an extremely important factor in determining whether or not the game set values are advantageous for the player.

Segment C can be lit when the game setting is 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6. Therefore, when the segment C is lit, it can be determined that the game set value is one of 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6, and when the segment C is not lit as a control target, the game set value is 2 (see FIG. 40(A)). In other words, when the segment C is lit, the game set value 2, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, is denied, but the game set values 5 and 6 may indicate whether the state is advantageous to the player. is left, the possibility of the game set value 1 is left at the same time. Therefore, it is difficult to judge whether the game setting value is advantageous for the player based solely on whether or not segment C is lit. It is important in judging together with the fact whether or not the other segment is lit when the other segment becomes the control target. For example, when segment E is lit as the other segment, it can be determined that the game set value is either 2 or 6 as described later. Therefore, when the segment C lights up and the segment E lights up, it is decided that the game set value 6 is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the segment C does not light up even though it has become a control target and the segment E lights up, it is determined that the game set value 2 is relatively disadvantageous to the player.

Segment D can be lit when the game setting is 2, 3, 5 or 6. Therefore, when the segment D is lit, it can be determined that the game set value is one of 2, 3, 5 and 6, and when the segment D is not lit as a control target, the game set value is 1 and 6. 4 (see FIG. 40(A)). That is, when the segment D is lit, the game set value 1, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, is denied, and the game set values 5 and 6, which are advantageous to the player, are more likely to be set, as in the case of the segment A. Therefore, it can be determined that the lighting of segment D is highly likely to be in an advantageous state for the player. It can be judged that the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state is high.

Segment E may be lit when the game set value is 2 or 6. Therefore, when the segment E is lit, it can be determined that the game set value is either 2 or 6, and when the segment E is not lit as a control target, the game set value is 1, 3, 4, and so on. 5 (see FIG. 40(A)). That is, since there is still a possibility that the game set value is 6 when the segment E is lit, the game set value 6 is affirmed and the game set value 2 is denied by the other segments at the same time as the segment E. , it can be determined whether or not the game setting value 6 is the most advantageous for the player. For example, if segment B is not lit as a control target, if segment C is lit, and if segment F is lit, game set value 6 is affirmed and game set value 2 is denied. Therefore, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the game setting value 6 is determined by lighting the segment E.

Segment F can be lit when the game set value is 4, 5 or 6. Therefore, when the segment F is lit, it can be determined that the game set value is one of 4, 5 and 6, and when the segment F is not lit as a control object, the game set value is 1, 2 and 6. 3 (see FIG. 40(A)). That is, when the segment F is lit, it can be determined that the game set values are 4, 5 or 6, which are the top three advantageous to the player. Conversely, if the segment F is not lit as a control target, it can be determined that the game set values 1, 2, or 3 are the lower three disadvantageous game set values for the player. Therefore, since it is possible to determine whether the game set value is high or low depending on whether or not the segment F is turned on as a controlled object, the player can decide whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine 10 in which the game is currently progressing. easier to judge.

Segment G can be lit when the game settings are 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. Therefore, when the segment G is lit, it can be determined that the game set value is any one of 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, and when the segment G is not lit as a control object, the game set value is determined. 1 (see FIG. 40(A)). In other words, it can be determined whether or not the game set value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the player depending on whether or not the segment G is turned on as a controlled object. Therefore, if the segment G is not turned on as a control target, the game set value is determined to be 1, so that the player is given an opportunity to end the game on the gaming machine 10 in which the game is currently progressing. be done.

In this way, the segments A to G do not have the same degree of importance in estimating the game set value, but differ in degree of importance. For example, the segments A to G differ in the ease of guessing the game set value itself and the ease of judging whether the game set value is high or low alone. and the easiness of guessing the high and low are different. Therefore, the easiness of guessing the game set values differs depending on the order in which the segments are controlled. In this embodiment, the segments A to G are controlled in the order according to the pattern selected from a plurality of control order patterns predetermined for each game set value (see FIG. 40(B)). As will be described later, the control order patterns include those in which the segments A to G are controlled in an order in which the game set values are difficult to guess.

The segments A to G to be controlled may be determined by lottery regardless of the control order pattern. In this case, when the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball 373 is plural, lottery is conducted the number of times corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball 373. Segments A to G determined by are sequentially controlled. Further, when the segments A to G to be controlled are determined by lottery, the selection rates of the segments A to G may be uniform, but the selection rate of at least one segment should be different from the selection rates of the other segments. good too. For example, it is conceivable to increase the selection rate of segments whose game setting values are difficult to guess, while decreasing the selection rate of segments whose game setting values are easy to guess. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being easily guessed when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is small.

Further, whether or not each of the segments A to G is to be controlled in the 7-segment display section 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. If it is clearly indicated that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, it becomes easier to guess the game set value than when it is not clearly indicated. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, it is not explicitly stated that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, and a method is adopted that makes it difficult to guess the game set values. When clearly indicating to the player that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, for example, by lighting the segment to be controlled, it is clearly indicated to the player that the segment is to be controlled. It is conceivable to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is to be controlled by lighting the segment in a color different from that when the segment is lit.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140. As shown in FIG.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 12 , the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7 , a launch control device 8 and a power control device 9 . The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 controls the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 . The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 .

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12 , the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of games in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42 and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of main control means of the present invention. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. The MPU 41 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . Also, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ball has entered the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, the variable winning hole 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. to judge. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 35 . Furthermore, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 provides the sound lamp control device 5 with a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, and a special out ball. Outputs commands such as detection commands and game set value change commands.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation display time and the lottery result of the big win lottery to the voice lamp control device 5, and includes information on the type of big win when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. The variation pattern command is set at step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. be. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

When the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M stored in the reservation storage area 412b described later increases, the first reservation command and the second reservation command are the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, the variation pattern, and This command notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. FIG. The first pending command and the second pending command are set based on information stored in a pending storage area 412b described later when the pending number N or the pending number M increases (see FIG. 22 described later). step S1207 or step S1209 of the first pending command setting process).

The shift command indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 when the reservation number N or the reservation number M decreases. This command notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the pass/fail information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process in FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. is set in the game state transition processing in the main processing of . In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, the jackpot game is started by the voice lamp control device 5 receiving the jackpot game start command. It is possible to grasp not only that, but also that the opening will start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the sound lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command to start each round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and to notify the sound lamp control device 5 of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , It is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 to be described later. In the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to grasp that the opening is finished by the round game start command and the opening/closing execution mode is started. Alternatively, the opening/closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening/closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 .

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and will be described later in FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. The sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and the number of segments (number of steps) to be controlled for lighting or extinguishing on the 7-segment display section 39. is determined.

The game set value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the game set value after the change, and is performed at step S1710 in the game set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. is set in

Commands other than the commands described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41 . Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 interrupts the main timer (to be described later) each time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the loading process is activated and executed. The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operating clocks of the control bodies in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

A ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41 . For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412, the reservation storage area 412b, and the electric worker reservation area 412c to set the big winning lottery and the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when judging the losing type. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 37 and the pattern display section 341. be Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the normal winning random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second prize winning opening 315 is to be in the open state, and the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4 are set. and a normal winning initial value counter CIN2 used for . Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reserved storage area 412b comprises a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the type of the variable game in which the 7-segment display 372 performs variable display and stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol game. be. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the 7 segment display 373 displays and stops is referred to as the second special symbol game. be.

When the game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success/failure information used in the lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. Further, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success/failure information used in the lottery, and stored in any one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition process of the right/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, etc.) are individually set for each of the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area REB. may be provided in

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area of the first reservation storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reserved storage area REB.

Therefore, the variation game executed based on the success/failure information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB 19 In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 .

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the success/failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. stored in the area where In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 for which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

Also, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the success/failure information is vacant in the order of priority of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. Stored in the area. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4, the first winning port 314 And it is possible to reserve up to four win/fail information as a winning history to the second winning hole 315, respectively.

In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315 are provided with a holding area with a maximum number of holdings of eight, and even in this case, the total number of holding areas is up to eight. It is possible to reserve win/fail information as a winning history. The storage processing of the win/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move the win/fail information stored in the . Specifically, the validity information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the validity information does not exist in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB. When the pending number storage area NAB is 0, the success/failure information in the first pending area REA1 of the first pending storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA and the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the second pending storage area REB is 2 or more. , it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the holding area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the success/failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variation game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on numerical information stored as success/failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and is transferred to the third reservation area REA1. The success/failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/failure information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the first reservation area REB1, and is transferred to the third reservation area REB1. The success/failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315.例文帳に追加

The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is set in two types corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is the probability variable gaming state, by the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 411 . Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table each have a probability that the lottery results of the jackpot lottery will result in a big win (jackpot probability) as a game set value. A plurality of hit/fail tables are provided which are different depending on the situation. The low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table each include six success/failure tables corresponding to game set values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the order of game set value 6, game set value 5, game set value 3, game set value 2, and game set value 1, the lottery result in the big lottery has a high jackpot probability and is advantageous to the player.

At the game set value 1, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 206 (0 to 205) for the high probability mode. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

At the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 212 (0 to 211) for the high probability mode. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

At the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 218 (0 to 217) for the high probability mode. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

At the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 224 (0 to 223) for the high probability mode. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

At the game setting value 5, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 230 (0 to 229) for the high probability mode. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

At the game set value 6, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 236 (0 to 235) for the high probability mode. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

Incidentally, if the value of the big win random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning the big win, the result of the big win lottery is lost.

Here, in the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, it is also considered that the random numbers that result in a big win are common to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery between the same game set values, but that the random numbers that result in a big win are not common. be done. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values, but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

In addition, six low-probability mode success/failure tables and six high-probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to game setting values in six stages, but at least one success/failure table for each mode is sufficient. In other words, the game set values are not limited to six stages. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game set values in multiple stages, and to provide one high-probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low probability mode, and not to provide stepwise game setting values for the high probability mode, thereby making the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode may be made uniform, and game setting values of multiple stages may be provided for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of two jackpot types, ie, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of the allocation table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (C), when the type of variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9 The number of random numbers for the 16R probability variable jackpot is 5, 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers for the 5R normal jackpot is 5, 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is five of 0 to 4, and the 16R probability variable jackpot and The number of the fourth random numbers is 5 to 14, which is 10, and the number of random numbers that are 5R normal jackpots is 5, which is 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop definite variable machine in which the probability of the definite variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Also, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), compared to the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), the jackpot The expected value for obtaining game balls is set high when the result of the lottery is a big win.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning are individually shaken. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins in the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the game. In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two type mixing machine, or the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", "5R normal It is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss.

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which round games are repeated 16 times in the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the machine shifts to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening an electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "5R variable probability big win", "16R probability variable big win" or "5R normal big win".

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state which is a low-probability mode with a low jackpot winning probability and a high-frequency support mode with a high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of times, such as 50 times or 100 times. The game continues until the game is completed, or ends when the player informs the player that the lottery result in the lottery for the big win is a big win before the specified number of times has passed.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop variable machine, after the jackpot game at the time of the variable probability big hit is completed, a preset specified number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) jackpot If the lottery is executed in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not become a big hit before the specified number of times has passed, the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), and the high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also possible to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state in the variable game as another embodiment. It should be noted that, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, it is not shifted to the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three kinds of jackpot types, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types, such as Round Regular Jackpot, 16R Regular Jackpot.

Also, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, according to the loss type table stored in the loss type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol shifts to the front and back of the reach symbol by one and stops, and the same reach occurs. The value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is set for each of the three kinds of loss types, namely, the ready-to-win except before and after the final stop pattern stops before and after the ready-to-win pattern, and the complete loss without the occurrence of the ready-to-win.

Here, FIG. 14D is a diagram showing an example of the exclusion type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (D), the value of the random number that becomes the front and back reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that becomes the reach other than the front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that becomes complete deviation is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 judges reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, a variable game shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the ready-to-win indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur during the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the stop display of the symbols. It is a variable state that In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation rendering process and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric role product 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory open counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is possible to win, and if the electric accessory open counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is possible to lose.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, the sound ramp control device 5 provides rough variation game effects such as high-speed variation effects (basic effects, non-reach effects), normal reach effects, super reach effects, and special reach effects. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or an off variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411 . Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation table and a loss fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table and the outlier fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is preset according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. are mapped. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 provides a normal jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" or "16R probability variable jackpot", the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, the lottery. If the result is "out", the outlier fluctuation table is referred to and the type of fluctuation pattern is specified.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15(A) and 15(B), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern "01" to "03" according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. Here, when the variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern with a variation display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the normal reach effect pattern is displayed in the symbol display section 341. is executed. The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the normal reach production. Further, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super ready-to-win effect pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the super ready-to-win effect is displayed in the pattern display section 341. pattern is executed. The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the super reach production. Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display section 341 determines the special reach pattern. A production pattern is executed. The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the special reach production.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the loss variation table, the variation type counter CS1 and the corresponding relationship with the variation pattern are defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front-rear out-of-reach reach or front-rear out-of-rear reach, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of deviation is complete deviation, either variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a variable display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type) and displays the pattern. In the part 341, the non-reach effect pattern is executed. Further, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variable display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and displays the pattern. In the part 341, the non-reach effect pattern is executed.

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display is stopped without a notice effect such as displaying a character, message, etc. is executed. In addition, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern "05", there is a variation display of the failure pattern in which the variation display is stopped with a symbol, accompanied by an advance notice effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. executed. Further, when the variation display at the time of loss corresponding to the variation pattern "05" is performed, a player-participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as an advance notice effect.

Note that the types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01". A normal reach effect is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super ready-to-win effects to be executed in the super ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and a selection is made from among them. Any Super Reach effect that has been done is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is higher than the normal reach effect, and the jackpot is won more than the special reach effect. Executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as special ready-to-win effects to be executed in the special ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03". Any of the special reach effects that have been performed are executed. The special ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, the normal ready-to-win effect or the super ready-to-win effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

Note that the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the state of operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which a single operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation of the operation button 20 by the player. A player-participation type operation effect such as a repeated hitting operation effect in which repeated hitting operations are reflected in the effect, and a long-pressing operation effect in which the long-pressing operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display section 37 and the pattern display section 341, it issues a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Input to the audio lamp controller 5 . Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 provides a variation pattern command " A01” to “A03” are output. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "B01" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03". to output one of "B03". Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern command "C01" with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03". to output one of "C03". In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 generates variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" in which "D" indicating failure is added before the variation patterns "01" to "05". output either Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in . Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to perform a variable display based on the details of the determined variable mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn off the light.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 performs a simple process of determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information relating to game history, ball payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores "out ball number", "general winning hole payout ball number", "first winning hole payout ball number", and "second winning hole payout ball number". ”, “Variable number of winning balls paid out”, “Game setting value”, “Base information”, “Continuous role information”, “Accessory ratio information”, “Accumulated number of jackpot lotteries”, “Number of unit jackpot lotteries” , “jackpot count”, and “consecutive loss count” are stored. Among these game information, "game setting value", "base information", "consecutive role ratio information", "player ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery number" ).

The "number of out balls" is an integrated value of the number of game balls shot to the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode). This "number of out-balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting out-balls detected by the out-ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "general winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the general winning hole 313 in the normal game state (low-probability mode, not high-frequency support mode). This "general winning hole payout ball number" is set by the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the general prize opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win. .

The "number of balls to be paid out to the first winning opening" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (low-probability mode, not high-frequency support mode). . This "first winning hole payout number of balls" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the current win when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the first winning hole 314 in the command setting process update to

"Second winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state (state of low probability mode and high frequency support mode). . This "number of balls to be paid out to the second winning hole" is determined when the ball sensor 315a detects the winning to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state, and the prize balls in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23 to be described later. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the second winning port 315 in the command setting process. update to.

“Variable winning hole payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state (state of high probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "variable winning hole payout number of balls" is set by a winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the variable winning port 316 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win. .

In addition, the "number of out balls", "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening", "number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening", "number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening", and "number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning opening" are shown in the figure below. 28, when the "number of out balls" reaches 60000 (step S1806: Yes), it is cleared to 0 (step S1810).

The "game setting value" is for selecting the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (success/failure determination). . In other words, the "game set value" defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, four stages of game setting values (four types of low probability mode success/failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 14(A)) and high probability mode success/failure tables (see FIG. 14(B)) ) are prepared. The "game set value" is updated in the game set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

The "base information" is information related to the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (low-probability mode and not the high-frequency support mode), and this "base" is the normal game state. It is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" to the "out ball number". If the "base" is represented by a mathematical formula, it is "base" = 100 x ("number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening" + "number of balls to be paid out to the first winning opening") / "number of out balls". The "base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 are updated each time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 28 (steps S1807 and S1808). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reaches 60,000 is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reaches 60,000 is It is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as the 60,000-ball base B2 before the previous one. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the current base BL is calculated (step S1803), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM412.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are included in the history. However, the past 3 or more 60,000 ball bases may be left as a history. Further, the "base information" may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall up to the present.

"Continuous role ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all the winning holes that pay out prize balls (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316). , it is information related to the "continuous accessory ratio", which is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the variable winning opening. If the "continuous role ratio" is represented by a formula, it is "continuous role ratio"=100*"variable number of payout balls"/"total number of payout balls". "Continuous role product ratio information" is updated, for example, in specific performance information update processing in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "continuous role ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous role ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. It should be noted that the "continuous role ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state. , a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous role ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous role ratio and the continuous role ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Character ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all winning holes that pay out prize balls (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) , and "accessory ratio" which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls of the second winning opening and the number of paid out balls of the variable winning opening. Expressing the "role product ratio" as a mathematical formula, "role product ratio"=100×("number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening"+"number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning opening")/"total number of balls to be paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “accessory ratio information” is stored as the accumulated accessory ratio from the installation of the gaming machine 10 in the game hall up to the present. Note that the "accessory ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, It may be a role ratio to the number of out balls reaching a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous role product ratio information" may include both the cumulative role product ratio and the role product ratio for a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is the number of It is the number of times the jackpot lottery was performed. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is the cumulative variation display count in which the pattern variation display on the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is triggered by the winning of the first winning port 314 in the normal game state. be. The "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is incremented by 1 each time the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. In addition, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of unit jackpot lotteries" is a jackpot lottery triggered by winning the first winning port 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and not high frequency support mode). It is the number of times received (the number of times the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display section 37 has been executed). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the number of difference balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the "unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of pattern variations displayed on the 7-segment display 372 averaging 1000 yen (the number of jackpot lotteries received) when 250 balls are rented for 1000 yen in a gaming hall. be. The "unit jackpot lottery count" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The "unit jackpot lottery count" is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the accumulated unit jackpot lottery count from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. It should be noted that the "number of unit jackpot lotteries" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, It may be for the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "unit jackpot lottery number", both the accumulated unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The "number of big wins" is the number of times the lottery result of the big win lottery has been a big win since the game machine 10 was started before the opening of the game hall. The "number of big hits" is incremented by one each time the game state is shifted to the big win game state in the game state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. Also, the "number of times of big wins" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of consecutive losses" is the number of times that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are consecutive losses in the normal game state (low-probability mode and not the high-frequency support mode), and the lottery result is a jackpot. cleared to 0 times. The "number of consecutive failures" is the result of the success/failure determination based on the low-probability mode success/failure table in step S1603 when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. 26 described later. If it is out, it is incremented by 1, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, it is cleared to 0 times. In this embodiment, the “number of consecutive losses” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the “number of consecutive failures” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "game setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in a game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. be. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46 and a ROM47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position when the inner frame 12 is expanded (see FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, which are called 4-digit 7-segment displays. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331. may be provided in It is also conceivable to use the two 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display section 37 to display the “base information”.

The 7-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying numbers "0"-"9" and alphabets "A"-"F". In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when the alphabet "B" is displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8", and the alphabet "D" is displayed. In order to distinguish from the number "0" when displaying, a dot is lit and "0." is displayed. Also, when any one of the alphabets "A" to "F" is displayed, it is conceivable to light up dots to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

The performance display monitor 43 has four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, of which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed by an abbreviated symbol, and the right two 7-segment displays Indicators 433 and 434 are ratio segments displaying the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 . For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation "BL" of the current base BL is "8." , and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" in the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434, which are ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3" and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by pressing the switch, and is located at an easy-to-operate position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded. provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, enabling the performance display monitor 43 to display the base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are de-energized and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. . Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided in a place other than the main controller 4 .

Here, FIG. 18A is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, as long as the performance display switch 44 is not turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 is displayed as "base information". The ball base B1→the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous one→the current base BL is looped in order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular time intervals. The example shown in FIG. 18(B) indicates that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in FIG. 18(C) indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in FIG. 18(D). 2 shows that the 60,000 ball base B2 of the game before last is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, e.g. A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 at regular time intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided in the main controller 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 . Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 . Further, a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, in place of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", such as "continuous role ratio information" and "player ratio information" are stored in the game information storage area 412d. Other performance information may be displayed.

Moreover, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the game set value display unit 45 selects the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery. It displays the above-mentioned game set values for the game, and is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the game set value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display. You may make it display a game setting value.

The setting value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off by pressing operation, and enables the change of the game setting value by rotating operation when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contact by a rotating operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of display on the game set value display section 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the game set value display unit 45 is in the off state and the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized and the game set value is displayed. A number is displayed on the display unit 45 . The numbers displayed at this time are the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current game setting values. In the illustrated example, the game set value is "1". On the other hand, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the game set value display unit 45 is lit, the power supply to the 7-segment display is interrupted and the game set value display unit 45 is turned off. state.

As shown in FIG. 18(B), when the game set value display unit 45 is in the lighting state and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated, the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is changed. be done. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the game set value display portion 45 is increased by rotating the game set value display portion 45 to the right, and the game set value is displayed by rotating the game set value display portion 45 to the left. The number displayed in section 45 becomes smaller. When the number displayed on the game set value display portion 45 is changed by rotating the game set value display portion 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the game set value. be. Therefore, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed to turn off the power of the 7-segment display while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number displayed immediately before turning off is determined as the game set value. As a result, the MPU 41 selects a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14A) or a high-probability mode success/failure table (FIG. ) reference)) can be used to make a jackpot lottery.

The method of changing the game set value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the game set value display portion 45 after rotating the set value change operation portion 46 . For example, by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to determine the game setting value, by repeatedly hitting or long pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) A method of turning off the power of the game set value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45. A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 may be used.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12 , the sub-control unit 332 includes a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on control signals input from the main control unit 331, the symbol display section 341 displays and Execute the presentation display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM511 and RAM512 are incorporated in MPU51.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as voices and lamp flashing patterns used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by means of the MPU 51, thereby issuing a command to the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (control signal) to control the display of the pattern display section 341 . The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display section 341, the reproduced sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect, which will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the audio lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. A configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . Then, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38, based on the command input from the main control device 4. , the 7-segment display section 39, and the like can be controlled. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 by the MPU 51, the game ball entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38 (special out A state in which the game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 are discharged through the discharge lane 382 is selected. Further, by controlling the 7-segment display portion 39 by the MPU 51, the number of segments corresponding to the number of special out balls retained in the game ball retention portion 38 is individually turned on or off. Moreover, the operation switch 20a is connected to input-output I/F52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display section 341 and the sound are output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control a sound output presentation, a lamp presentation by the flickering mode of the illumination part 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4 .

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the variation pattern command, changes the variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination (see FIG. 36A), variation display time, variation type (FIG. 36 (A))), and the effect pattern type (see FIGS. 37(A) to 37(C)) are determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see FIG. 35 (see step S2105 in the command determination process of ), the pattern display unit 341 is caused to start the pattern variation display. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a failure, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the failure is displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 executes a ball payout performance suggestive image display process for displaying a ball payout performance suggestive image suggesting the ball payout performance on the sub-image display unit 38 .

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5 to execute the symbol variation display and effect display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 and the like, and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Two-way communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612 . The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as variable symbols such as main symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, advance notice effect images, ready-to-win effect images, jackpot effect images, and loss effect images. ing. The images displayed on the pattern display section 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbols. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and effect display.

A RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61 . Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 .

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 .

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not game balls are paid out, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting a game ball to be paid out is provided. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Also, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73 . The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball jamming (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to put out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to release a predetermined number of game balls. be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 . Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby moving the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the shooting rail 321. feed above. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby directing the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31. to fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a driving signal. As a result, the game machine 10 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 22, increases the shooting intensity of the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 22 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the shooting handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. is provided. The shooting control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, and when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, preventing the game from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 . Further, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with the thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply controller 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drivers, etc., a +5V voltage for logic used in the controller, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8 and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

In addition, the power control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply has been cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power failure state occurs when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge. In addition, the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when receiving a power failure signal from the power control device 9, interrupts the control being executed and executes a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 33. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed when a power failure occurs. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. Note that in the present embodiment, descriptions of start-up processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 . The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of sensors connected to the main controller 4 and the like. For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball to any of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a is detected. Further, when out balls are detected by the out ball sensor 35, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. do. Furthermore, when the special out-ball sensor 384 detects a special out-ball sensor 384 , the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command and stores this special out-ball detection command in the RAM 412 . The number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d reaches 60,000 balls and is cleared to 0 balls when the 60,000 ball base B1 was calculated last time (step S1810 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 28). reference).

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reach the maximum value. If so, clear the counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes start-up winning processing associated with winning to the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes launch control processing (step S1005). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the shooting handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process to enable the launch of the . Further, in the shooting control process, when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated, shooting of the game ball is disabled. It is a process to The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a normal drawing winning lottery to determine whether or not to set the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 to the open state based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electricity holding area 412c. performs slew gate processing. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol is won when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and loses when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. We judge that it is. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol winning is determined when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and is lost when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. We judge that it is. Then, when the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol winning is determined in the through gate process, the electric accessary 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second prize winning port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The starting winning process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314. FIG. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102. ), and the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 23 and S1312), and stores the counter value in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412 .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the contents of the success/failure information before the success/failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the determination target of the success/failure of the jackpot in the variation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later. A first pending command setting process for setting the first pending command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second prize winning port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107. ), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and a variation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 23 and S1312), and stores the counter value in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB in the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41, before the propriety information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a determination target of the propriety of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing described later (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26), the propriety information The content is confirmed, and the second reserved command setting process is executed to set the second reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second pending command setting process is the same as the first pending command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The second pending command setting process is the same as the first pending command setting process in FIG. good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. In addition, the first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or out), variation pattern and information such as the number of pending N . The first pending command setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the pending number N from the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first pending from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202 : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main processing described later, and the jackpot game from the high probability mode. Judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag which is set to OFF when transitioning to another game state such as state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the big hit random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to winning the big hit. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the probability mode success/failure table, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to winning the jackpot is determined.

Incidentally, in steps S1203 and S1204, success/failure determination is executed based on the high-probability mode success/failure table or the low-probability mode success/failure table stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading out the game setting values stored in step S1710 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. Appropriateness determination may be performed by selecting the mode appropriateness table one by one.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read out from is not a value corresponding to winning the jackpot (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, MPU41 reads out the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. For example, when the winning/failure information is stored in the third reservation area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type The counter value of counter CS1 is read. In addition, among the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4, the reservation area in which win/fail information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. can be determined by

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number N contained in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which one of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 corresponds to the right/fail information stored in the first reservation command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command (step S1209).

Note that the first pending command set to ON in the first pending command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 together with the command of . Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to the one described here as long as the sound lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 . In the main process, main control processes for progress of the variation game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 are executed as regular processes with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next period. be.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 sends output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Execute external output processing to send to. For example, in the RAM 412 commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a game set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command If so, it sends that command to the audio lamp controller 5 . Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 to be described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7 .

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁At this time, the MPU 41 stores the game information in the RAM 412 when winning occurs in the general winning port 313 or the first winning port 314 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and not the high-frequency support mode). The number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening or the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening stored in the area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from the current winning. In addition, the MPU 41 is in the second winning port 315 in the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) When a prize has been won, the number of balls to be paid out from the second winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. Further, in the jackpot game state, when a prize is won in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. is added to the value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, MPU41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variation game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. In the variation game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variation pattern command necessary for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. be done. At this time, the MPU 41 is the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319 for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, thereby determining the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the shift to the jackpot game (jackpot type ) is executed as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot types are the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot. Also, in the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when each round game is started in the open/close execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when the ending is started.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start processing of FIG. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 changes the game state to a jackpot game state in which the open/close execution mode is executed, a probability variable game state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high Shift to a short-time game state which is a frequency support mode, a normal game state which is not a high-frequency support mode in a low-probability mode, or the like.

For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state after the variable game for notifying the lottery result ends. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the big win game is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the big win game state to a predetermined game state according to the lottery result of the big win lottery which triggered the execution of the big win game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, the state is shifted to a time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, when notification of the lottery result for the jackpot lottery of the prescribed number of times is completed in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variation game.

Further, when the transition of the game state is caused, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the game state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the game state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to ON while setting the jackpot game flag to OFF when there is a transition of the game state from the jackpot game state to the variable probability game state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the game state from the variable probability game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot game flag is set to ON.

Furthermore, when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "jackpot count" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.例文帳に追加

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes game set value change processing. In this game set value change process, a process of controlling the display or non-display of the game set value or the change of the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d according to the operation of the set value change operation section 46 is executed. be. Details of the game set value change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process and before the game ball is started to be launched. A limited execution is also conceivable. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game set values cannot be changed until the power is turned on next time. can be prevented.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing in the game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

<Step S1309>
In step S<b>1309 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 . In the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43, processing for displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and each process after S1301 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), steps S1310, S1311 and S1312 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1311>
At step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variation game control process]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is executed. When the game ends and the jackpot game is not in progress (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. The presence or absence of the execution of the jackpot game is set to ON at the time of transition to the jackpot game state in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. It is determined based on the jackpot game flag set to .

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of variation display in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. It is determined based on the variable display flag set to OFF in step S1405 of the variable game control process.

<Step S1403>
At step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. Then, when it is determined that the variation display time has not passed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop and display the symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( Step S1404), the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If it is not during the symbol variation display (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 is the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the pending storage area 412b, the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the win/fail information data stored in the reservation storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes variation start processing for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform variation display based on the success/failure information, and terminates the variation game control processing. Details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of data setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. The data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes) , the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1505, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA (step S1502), from the first pending area REA1 to the execution area AE The pass/fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success/failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success/failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The success/failure information is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 moves when the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 moves when both or one of the pending number M and the pending number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the right/fail information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved. The success/failure information is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and shifts the process to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. The fluctuation start processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is the high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined based on whether or not the high probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23, is set to ON. . When the game state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and when the game state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the game state is the low probability mode. If so, the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 stores a reserved storage area based on a high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later. Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/fail information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 reserves the Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/fail information stored in the execution area AE of the storage area 412b is a value corresponding to winning the jackpot is determined.

Incidentally, in steps S1602 and S1603, success/failure determination is executed based on a high-probability mode success/failure table or a low-probability mode success/failure table that is stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading out the game setting values saved in step S1710 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. Appropriateness determination may be performed by selecting the mode appropriateness table one by one.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variable game to the variable display time counter. Specifically, the MPU 41, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the normal jackpot, the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15(A)) Identify. In addition, MPU41, when the result of the success or failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15 (B)) to specify the variation pattern based on . Furthermore, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is an error, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the error variation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command including the lottery result of the big winning lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 5, and the audio ramp control device 5 displays the pattern based on the variation pattern command. Symbol variation display by the unit 341 and the like are executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that the 5R normal jackpot is "A01" to " A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot to the variation patterns "01" to "03". is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "C" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot "C01" to "C03" is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 selects one of the variation patterns "D01" to "D08" with "D" indicating failure to the variation patterns "01" to "08". It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 includes in the variation pattern command information as to whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach, or a complete loss.

<Step S1606>
At step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display section 37, and terminates the variation start process. When starting the variable display of symbols on the main display section 37, the MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to ON. This variable display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variable game control process of FIG. Further, when starting the symbol variation display on the main display section 37, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. FIG. Furthermore, when the result of the win/loss determination based on the low-probability mode win/fail table in step S1603 is a loss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of times of consecutive failures" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the win/loss result is a jackpot. If there is, clear "Consecutive Loss Count" to 0 times.

[Game setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game set value change process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. The game set value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress, and if the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the game set value change processing ends. However, if the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag set to ON at step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG.

<Step S1702>
If it is not during the symbol variation display (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702), and if it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting When the value change process is terminated and the jackpot game state is not set (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display nor the jackpot game state is in effect (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the game set value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, It is determined whether or not an operation to turn on the power of the game set value display unit 45 has been made to the set value change operation unit 46 . That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting value is not displayed and the game setting value can be changed. do not have. Here, when the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704, and the power of the game set value display unit 45 is turned on from off. (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the game set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1704), the number indicating the read game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). Thereby, the current game set value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the set value display flag indicating that the game set value is being displayed on the game set value display unit 45 (step S1706), and ends the game set value change processing.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that the game setting value is being displayed in the game setting value display section 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No). That is, if the game set value display unit 45 is not turned on and the power is not turned on, the game set value change processing is terminated.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game set value has been performed. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709 when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), and when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process proceeds to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes processing for changing the display on the game set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before rotation. Conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before rotation is displayed.

When the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 before rotation is "4" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the game set value display section 45 displays The displayed number is changed to "1", and when the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 before rotation is "1", the set value change operation section 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the left direction. In this case, the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 is changed to "4". Further, when the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 is "4", it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 is "1". In some cases, no more leftward rotations may be allowed.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting values in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the numbers displayed on the game setting value display section 45 as game setting values, and terminates the game setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the set value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game set values stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off are finally stored in the RAM 412 as valid game set values. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, by rotating the set value change operation unit 46 to change the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45, the game set values stored in the RAM 412 are changed. By turning off the power of the game set value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45, the game set value can be determined.

<Step S1711>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the game set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the set value It is determined whether or not an operation to turn off the game set value display section 45 has been performed on the change operation section 46 . When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S1711: No), the game set value change process is terminated. When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1711: Yes), the game set value display unit 45 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment display device, thereby changing the game set value. is extinguished, and the game setting values are determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 enters the low probability mode according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. The success/failure table (see FIG. 14A) and the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value displaying flag to OFF, and terminates the game setting value changing process.

Here, in step S1712, a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14A) and a high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14B) corresponding to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 are displayed. ) is selected. That is, since the win/fail table with the same game setting value is selected for the low-probability mode win/fail table and the high-probability mode win/fail table, the operation for changing the game setting value is easy. However, the game set value in the low probability mode and the game set value in the high probability mode may be changed separately. In this case, for example, the game setting value of the low probability mode is set to "1", and the game setting value of the high probability mode is set to "4". It becomes possible to set it as a setting value.

[Performance information update process]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1309 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads the number of payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and further reads out the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Read is performed (step S1802). Here, the number of various payout balls is the number of payout balls required for updating the base information, etc., and the number of payout balls from the general winning opening, the number of paying out balls from the first winning opening, the number of paying out balls from the second winning opening, and the number of paying out balls from the variable winning opening. number applies. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read out number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening, the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening, and the number of out balls. The current base BL is overwritten and updated (step S1803) (see FIG. 29A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100×(the number of balls paid out from the general winning opening + the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening)/the number of out balls.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads the cumulative jackpot lottery count (cumulative change display count) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit jackpot lottery count stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1805). The number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is calculated as the number of symbol variation display times (number of jackpot lottery receptions) on the 7-segment display 372 until the number of minus difference balls becomes 250 balls in the normal game state. Specifically, the unit jackpot lottery count = “cumulative jackpot lottery count” / ((“number of out balls” - “number of balls dispensed to general winning opening” - “number of balls dispensed to first winning opening”) / 250 balls) be done. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is calculated as the accumulated unit jackpot lottery count from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read out in step S1802 has reached 60000 balls. , and if the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 (step S1806: No), the specific performance information update process ends.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
When the number of out balls reaches 60000 (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base two times before in the base information (step S1807), and step S1803. is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1808), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of payout balls and the number of out balls to 0 balls in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1810), and terminates the specific performance information update process.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main processing of FIG. The display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in FIG. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 to be described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1918 in FIG. 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 in FIG. 33, and if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the End the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. exit.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 29, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. ), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. , “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. "8.", "1", "2" and "9" indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), End the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is interrupted in the performance display monitor 43, thereby turning off the alphabet indicating the current base BL. and the numbers are extinguished.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1915) and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. S1917), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 included in the information two times before (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. , “3”, and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. "8.", "2", "3", and "3" indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the fixed time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1922). , the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 Alphabets and numbers indicating are extinguished.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1924) and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. S1926), it is determined whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The current base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. exit.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the 60,000-ball base B2 is displayed two times before. Alphabets and numbers indicating are extinguished.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), the display control process ends.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40. FIG.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 . In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when starting up the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. Description of these processes is omitted.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 performs counter update processing (step S2001), command determination processing (step S2002), variable game effect processing (step S2003), jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) in the secondary timer interrupt processing. , and game set value display processing (step S2005).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, effect pattern type counter, fluctuation display counter, control order pattern type counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of main symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. Also, the effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the control order pattern type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The control order pattern type counter updated here is used to determine the order of control targets for the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 . For example, the control order pattern type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99.

[Command judgment processing]
In command determination processing (step S2002), a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 35, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), it ends the command determination process. Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2101 and is processed, and is stored in the processing work storage area, for example. remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2103, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2102: No), the process proceeds to step S2108.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbols and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 36A) stored in advance in the ROM 511, a variation type table (see FIG. 36B), and an effect type table ( 37(A) to 37(C)) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512, the variation pattern is determined. Moreover, MPU51 sets the big-hit flag according to a big-hit classification to ON, when the information regarding a big-hit classification is contained in a variation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to ON. is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 37A), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 37B), and a special reach. A special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 37(C)) is included.

Here, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, FIG. 36 (A) shows that the main symbols are "1" to "9", and the symbol combination indicating that "333" is a definite variable jackpot (either 5R definite variable jackpot or 16R definite variable jackpot), "777 ” is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the double eyes other than “333” and “777” are either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbols, and the first stop symbols are selected with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", there is no distribution of "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "7". That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stop-displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "333" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable big win", double symbol combinations other than "333" whose main symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal big win can be stop-displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", when a main symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 determines that the jackpot game is a 5R probability variable jackpot. The specified 5R probability variation promotion performance is executed.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16 probability variable jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main patterns "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the main patterns "1" to "9" Design is determined. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the "777" symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the stop display result of the main symbol is a symbol combination other than "777" which suggests 5R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot. can be When the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', when ``7'' is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes 16R promotion performance for indicating 16R probability variable big win in the jackpot game.

Then, when the lottery result is a big win and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stop-displayed on the active line of the symbol display portion 341 in the game round is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "out", all the main symbols "1" to "9" are sorted, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "losing", the losing type selected based on the losing type table (FIG. 14(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol A second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the outlier type is front and rear outreach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the out-of-order type is a ready-to-win other than front-to-rear out-of-order, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the above-mentioned loss type is complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The combination of the main symbols and the stop symbols may be determined by the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound ramp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. may decide.

Also, FIG. 36B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 36B, the variation type table defines the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" with a lottery result of "normal jackpot" and a variation pattern of "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30 s" and a variation type of "normal ready-to-win effect pattern". In addition, the variation pattern command "B02" with the lottery result "5R probability variable jackpot" and the variation pattern "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern". A variation pattern command "C03" having a lottery result of "16R probability variable jackpot" and a variation pattern of "03" is associated with a variation display time of "90 s" and a variation type of "special ready-to-win effect pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" with the lottery result "loss" and the variation pattern "04" is associated with the variation display time "7 s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern". The variation pattern command "D05" with the result "off" and the variation pattern "05" is associated with the variation display time "10 s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern".

Further, FIGS. 37(A) to 37(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The production pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (production pattern). Specifically, FIG. 37(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. It is a super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the individual effect type is the super ready-to-win effect, and FIG. 37(C) is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special ready-to-win effect. It is a special reach production pattern type selection table.

In the present embodiment, a case in which there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the number of types of effects may be six or more. In addition, in FIG. 37, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 37 (A), the production pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss) "Production pattern X1" to "Production pattern X5" are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern X1 to the production pattern X3 included in the normal ready-to-win production pattern type selection table are productions in which, for example, the normal ready-to-win production in which the main pattern is in the ready-to-win state after the high-speed fluctuation production in which the main pattern fluctuates at high speed is completed. , The final individual effect type is a normal reach effect.

In addition, in the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 37(B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the super ready-to-win effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from a table. Here, the production pattern Y1 to production pattern Y3 included in the super ready-to-win production pattern type selection table, for example, the normal ready-to-win production is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and furthermore, as the final individual production type, the expected degree of jackpot is higher than the normal ready-to-win production. It is a production that develops into a super reach production that is high and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table may include a super ready-to-win effect pattern effect that develops into a super ready-to-win effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed without going through the normal ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 37(C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the result of the lottery. It is When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the special ready-to-win effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from a table. Here, the production pattern Z1 to production pattern Z3 included in the special reach production pattern type selection table, for example, normal reach production and super reach production are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and normal reach production and super reach production are executed as the final individual production type. It is a production that develops into a special reach production with a higher expectation for a big hit than the ready-to-win production and a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The special reach production pattern type selection table includes a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production or the normal reach production without going through at least one of the normal reach production and the super reach production. You can

Then, the MPU 51 stores the display variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, the effect type counter, and the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined based on the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type) in the RAM 512. set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command to the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S2001 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the content of the stop symbol combination of the main symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the variation type (effect pattern type). The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image of the main symbol and the effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and displays a plurality of main symbols. The main pattern fluctuations are stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of the main symbols, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the like. .

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 sets the jackpot game execution flag to ON at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining the effect to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening/closing execution mode effect which are executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect), and determines whether or not the opening effect start process is executed in the big win game effect process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Referenced when making a decision.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating to start the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when starting the round game in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110, and when the received command is not the round game start command (step S2109: No), the process to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S2310). The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2204 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, MPU51, if the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2112, if the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the process to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2312). The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2204 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and is the main timer of FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, if the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out-ball detection command (step S2113: No). , the process proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to add the value of the special out ball counter in step S2207 in the game set value display process of FIG.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S2115: No), the process proceeds to step S2116. The process proceeds to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Also, the ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the game set value display process of FIG. be done.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, whether or not the ending effect end process is executed. It is referred to when judging Also, the jackpot game effect end flag is referred to in step S2301 in the 7-segment display control process of FIG.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a game set value change command. The game set value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the changed game set value, and is set in step S1710 in the game set value change process of FIG. be done. Here, if the received command is a game set value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120, and if the received command is not a game set value change command (step S2119: No). , the process proceeds to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting value included in the game setting value change command and stores the changed game setting value. The game set values stored in the RAM 512 are read at step S2305 in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. be.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main controller 4, and then terminates the command determination processing.

[Variation game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect processing (step S2003) of the secondary timer interrupt processing, in the variable game for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, when the variation pattern command is received, the command determination processing of FIG. A variable game effect in line with the effect pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the like.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) of the secondary timer interrupt process, the opening effect, ending effect and opening/closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process in step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 35 are executed.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the game setting value display processing (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt processing, the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each segment of the 7-segment display portion 39 is controlled. . Here, FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game set value display process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 38, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON at step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, if the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202, and if the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S2201: No ), and the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2202>
If the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of the command determination process in FIG. 35 is set to ON. is determined (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position according to the 5R normal jackpot flag. Here, when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2203, and when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2202: No ), and the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2203>
When the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 51 lowers the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2203). Thereby, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38 , the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382 . At this time, the game ball 99 moving from the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 .

<Steps S2204 and S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2203), the MPU 51 turns on the stopper portion downward movement flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is downwardly moving. (step S2204). The stopper portion downward movement flag is referred to in step S2207 to determine whether the special out ball detection flag, which is set to ON in step S2112 in the command determination process of FIG. 35, is set to ON. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position (step S2205).

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 sets off the jackpot type flags (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag) that can be set to ON in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2207>
When the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the stopper portion downward movement flag set to ON in step S2204 is set to ON (step S2207). ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time for the game ball (special out ball) staying in the staying lane 381 to be detected by the special out ball sensor 384 . Here, when the stopper portion downward movement flag is set to ON (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and when the stopper portion downward movement flag is set to OFF (step S2207). : No), the game set value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
When the stopper portion downward movement flag is set to ON (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set to ON (step S2208). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON at step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is set to ON (step S2208: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the memory in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and performs processing. goes to step S2210, and if the special out ball detection flag is set to OFF (step S2208: No), the process goes to step S2210.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
At step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the lowering time counter set at step S2205. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position. Here, if the value of the lowering time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2212, and if the value of the lowering time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), End the game set value display process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the downward motion counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns it on in step S2204. The set stopper portion downward movement flag is set to OFF (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retention section 38 is returned to a state in which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 .

<Step S2214>
In step S<b>2214 , the MPU 51 executes 7-segment display section control processing for controlling the lighting state of the 7-segment display section 39 . The 7-segment display unit control processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[7-segment display section control processing]
Here, FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in the game set value display process of FIG.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 39, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag indicating that it is time to end the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to turn off the segments that are lit in the 7-segment display section 39 . Here, when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2310, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S2301 : No), the process proceeds to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S2301: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 7-segment display flag is set to ON (step S2302). The 7-segment display flag is a flag indicating that one of the segments of the 7-segment display section 39 may be lit, and is set to ON in step S2309, which will be described later.

<Steps S2303 and S2304>
At step S2303, the MPU 51 acquires the value of the special out ball counter which is added in step S2209 of FIG. ). The value of the special out ball counter is determined by winning the variable winning hole 316 and the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period (the period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode). It is the number of special out balls that entered the ball. Then, when the value of the special out ball counter is 0 (step S2304: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the 7-segment display section control processing because it is not necessary to light the segments of the 7-segment display section 39 . On the other hand, if the value of the special out ball counter is not 0 (step S2304: No), the process proceeds to step S2305.

<Steps S2305 and S2306>
At step S2305, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512, and selects the control order pattern type based on this game setting value (step S2306). Specifically, the MPU 51 selects a control order pattern type according to the game setting value from six control order pattern type selection tables (see FIGS. 40(B) and 40(C)) set for each game setting value. The table is selected, the value of the control order pattern type counter is acquired, and the control order pattern type corresponding to the value of the control order pattern type counter is selected from the control order pattern type selection table.

Here, before explaining the control order pattern types, with reference to FIG. Explain the correspondence with

As shown in FIG. 40(A), the control state of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to numerical values 1 to 6 displayed as game set values (power supply (lighting) or cutoff (lighting out)) is displayed. is shown. The player sets the numbers (game set values) displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on whether the segments A to G to be controlled are lit or unlit according to the number of special out balls. can be inferred. For example, when the power is supplied to the segment A and the segment A is turned on, the game set value is one of 2, 3, 5, and 6 as described above, and the power to the segment A is cut off. It can be determined that the game set value is either 1 or 4 by turning off the segment A. For the other segments B to G, similarly, it is possible to guess the game set values based on whether they are in the lighting state or in the non-lighting state. However, as described above, the segments A to G indicate the degree of importance in estimating the game set value, that is, the ease of estimating the game set value itself by itself, and the determination of whether the game set value is high or low by itself. The easiness of play is different, and the easiness of guessing the game set value and its level by combination with other segments is different. The game setting value can be determined more accurately by a combination of the lit state and the extinguished state of the plurality of segments A to G, and the greater the number of segments to be controlled, the more accurate it is. The game set value can be determined immediately, and the game set value can be recognized by controlling all of at least seven segments A to G (see FIG. 11(B)). Also, depending on the game set value and the control order, the game set value can be recognized before all of the seven segments A to G are controlled.

Here, FIG. 40(B) is a control order pattern type selection table for the game set value 1, and FIG. 40(C) is a control order pattern type selection table for the game set value 1. FIG. Although the control order pattern type selection table for game set values 2 to 4 is omitted, the control order pattern type selection table is set for each game set value. The control order pattern type selection table is a table for determining the order of priority of which of the segments A to G in the 7-segment display section 39 is to be lit. stipulated.

In this embodiment, seven control order patterns are defined for each game set value. The seven control order patterns defined for each game set value include a control order pattern whose game set value is difficult to guess, and facilitate selection of the control order pattern whose game set value is difficult to guess. is preferred. For example, when the game set value is 1, as shown in FIG. 40B, pattern A1 is most likely to be selected, followed by pattern B1, followed by patterns C1 to E1, patterns F1 and G1. is difficult to select.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(A), when the game set value is 1 and there is one controlled object, the segment A becomes the controlled object and two game set values are set before it is turned on. It can be determined that it is either 1 or 2, and segment B can be determined to be any of the four game set values 1 to 4 at the stage when it is lit as a control target, and segment C is a control target. When segment D is turned on, it can be determined that it is one of the five game set values 1, 3, 4 to 6, and when segment D is not turned on as a control target, it can be set to either of the two game set values 1 and 4. Segment E can be determined to be any one of the four game setting values 1, 3, 4, and 5 at the stage where segment E is the object of control and is not lit, and segment F is the stage where segment F is the object of control and is not lit. It can be determined that it is one of the three game set values 1 to 3, and the game set value of 1 is determined at the stage where the segment G is not lit as a control target. That is, segment C can be determined to be one of the five game setting values including game setting value 1, so it is difficult to guess the game setting value, and segments B and E are four game setting values including game setting value 1. Since it is difficult to guess the game set value because it can be determined that it is one of the set values, the priority of the control target tends to be raised. On the other hand, since it is determined that the game set value is 1 when the segment G is not lit, the priority of the segment G to be controlled is the lowest among the seven segments AG. Since it can be determined that the segment F is one of three game set values including the game set value 1, and the segments A and D are one of the two game set values including the game set value 1, these segments A and D , F tend to be given lower priority than segments B, C and E, but tend to be given higher priority than segment G.

When the game set value is 6, as expected from FIG. 40(A), there is a tendency for the priority to increase in the order of segments C and G→segments A and D→segment F→segments B and E. . When the game set value is 6, patterns A6 to D6 are most likely to be selected, followed by pattern E6, and patterns F6 and G6 are less likely to be selected, as shown in FIG. 40(C). Similarly, for the game set values 2 to 5, the control order pattern types and their selection rates are appropriately determined so that the segments whose game set values are difficult to guess tend to have higher priority to be controlled.

In this embodiment, a control order pattern type selection table is prepared for each game set value, and the order of segments A to G to be controlled is determined based on the control order pattern type selection table corresponding to the game set value. However, each time the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the segments A to G to be controlled may be selected by lottery.

<Steps S2307-2309>
Returning to the description of FIG. 39, at step S2307, the MPU 51 performs 7 segments based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired at step S2303 and the control order pattern type selected according to the game setting value at step S2308. Each segment A to G of the display unit 39 is controlled. Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2308), sets the 7-segment displaying flag to ON (step S2309), and terminates the 7-segment display section control process.

Here, an example of controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 when the game set value is 1 and the pattern A1 (see FIG. 40B) is selected as the control order pattern will be described.

For example, when the value of the special out ball counter is 1, segment C is lit by supplying power to segment C, which is a control target. In this case, the game setting value 2 is denied, and it can be determined that the game setting value is one of 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

When the value of the special out ball counter is 2, the extinguished state of segment E, which is the control target, is maintained. In this case, it cannot be determined whether or not the segment E is currently being controlled.

When the value of the special out ball counter is 3, segment B is lit by supplying power to segment B, which is the control target. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 3 and the segments B and C are lit, the game set values 5 and 6 are denied and it can be determined that the game set value is 1, 3 or 4. .

When the value of the special out ball counter is 4, the extinguished state of segment A, which is the control target, is maintained. In this case, it cannot be determined whether or not the segment A is currently being controlled.

When the value of the special out ball counter is 5, the extinguished state of segment D, which is the object of control, is maintained. In this case, since the segments B and C are lit, and the remaining five segments A, D to G are turned off as the three segments to be controlled, the two segments E and F are turned off. A value of 3 is negated. Therefore, it can be determined that the game set value is either 1 or 4.

When the value of the special out ball counter is 6, the extinguished state of segment F, which is the object of control, is maintained. In this case, segments B and C are lit, and four segments out of the remaining five segments A, D to G are turned off as objects of control, so three segments A, D, and E are turned off. Game setting value 4 is denied. Therefore, it is determined that the game set value is 1.

When the value of the special out ball counter is 7 or more, the segment G to be controlled is maintained in the off state. In this case, similarly to the case where the value of the special out ball counter is 6, it is determined that the game set value is 1.

Also, an example of controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 when the game set value is 6 and the pattern C6 (see FIG. 40(C)) is selected as the control order pattern will be described.

For example, when the value of the special out ball counter is 1, the segment G is lit by supplying power to the segment G, which is the control target. In this case, the game set value 1 is denied, and it can be determined that the game set value is any one of 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

When the value of the special out ball counter is 2, segment D is lit by supplying power to segment D, which is the control target. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 2 and the segments D and G are lit, the game set value 4 is denied and it can be determined that the game set value is 2, 3, 5 or 6. .

When the value of the special out ball counter is 3, segment A is lit by supplying power to segment A, which is the object of control. In this case, since the number of special out balls is three and the segments A, D, and G are lit, it cannot be determined which of the game set values is 2, 3, 5, or 6.

When the value of the special out ball counter is 4, segment C is lit by supplying power to segment C, which is a control target. In this case, since the number of special out balls is four and the segments A, C, D and G are lit, the game set value 2 is denied and the game set value is either 3, 5 or 6. I can judge.

When the value of the special out ball counter is 5, segment F is lit by supplying power to segment F, which is the control target. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 5 and the segments A, C, D, F and G are lit, the game set value 3 is denied and the game set value is either 5 or 6. I can judge.

When the value of the special out ball counter is 6, the light-out state of segment B, which is the object of control, is maintained. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 6, segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit, and either segment B or E is unlit, the game set value is either 5 or 6. It cannot be determined whether

When the value of the special out ball counter is 7 or more, segment E is lit by supplying power to segment E, which is a control target. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 7 or more and the segments A, C, D, E, F and G are lit, the game set value is determined to be 6.

As described above, each segment A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2303 and the control order pattern type selected in accordance with the game setting value in step S2308. is controlled, based on the game setting value, the value of the special out ball counter, and the control order pattern type, the corresponding segment among the seven segments A to G on the seven segment display section 39 is lit. be done. As a result, the player can guess the game set value based on the number of special out balls and the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 .

In addition, when a plurality of segments A to G of the seven-segment display section 39 are to be controlled, these segments A to G may be controlled simultaneously, or the segments A to G may be controlled with time differences according to the control order. You may When the segments A to G are controlled at the same time, all the segments A to G or the number of control target segments corresponding to the number of special out balls may be flashed, and then the control target segments may be lit or extinguished. On the other hand, when a plurality of segments A to G are controlled with a time difference, the time difference is, for example, about 0.1 to 5 seconds. The control target segments A to G may be lit or extinguished after the fact is specified.

<Steps S2310-2312>
Returning to the description of FIG. 39, when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segment in the 7-segment display section 39 (step S2310). Then, the MPU 51 turns on the 7-segment display flag indicating that the 7-segment display unit 39 is displaying (step S2311), further turns off the jackpot game effect end flag (step S2312), The 7-segment display section control processing is ended.

By the way, some game machines have a plurality of game set values with different jackpot winning probabilities in a jackpot lottery, and the game hall side can select the game set value. In this case, the game hall desires to set the game set value low in order to reduce the expected value of payout. When the game set value is set low, it is desirable to prevent the player from stopping the game due to the player recognizing that the game set value is low. There is a tendency to desire a game machine that is unknown. In addition, there is a game machine that indicates or indicates a game set value by means of an image selected by lottery at predetermined timings such as when a big win is confirmed, when a big win game starts, when a big win game ends, and the like.

On the other hand, the player guesses the game setting value (narrowing down to a plurality of game setting values) or Desire for recognizable playability. In this way, there is a tendency for game halls and players to desire conflicting wishes.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot, among the game balls 99 that have won the variable winning port 316, the special A game ball (special out ball) entering the out ball mouth 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention part 38.例文帳に追加After a predetermined period of time, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) staying in the staying lane 381 is counted, and segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled according to the number of counts. do. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are neither controlled nor illuminated unless at least the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a jackpot and the game is shifted to the jackpot game. Therefore, the game set values are not assumed or recognized unless the game is shifted to a big winning game.

In addition, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37. A game ball 99 is expected to enter. Therefore, it is difficult to guess or recognize the game set values from the 7-segment display section 39 in one big win (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, during a predetermined period, after the jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot is started, the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game is ended (ending is started). until In other words, if the first win is a probability variable jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the jackpot succession in the high probability mode continues, and the normal jackpot game will be opened and closed when the normal jackpot is won. Continue until the mode ends. That is, in this embodiment, although it has a game property that it is not easy to recognize the game set value, the more games are played by the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the more the jackpot consecutive games in the high probability mode continue. The ball 99 is expected to enter, the game setting value can be estimated more accurately, and at least when seven or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373, the game setting value can be recognized reliably.

By the way, in a conventional slot machine, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed may display an image suggesting or specifying a game set value. The image that suggests or indicates the game set value is displayed, for example, on the jackpot confirmation screen, jackpot start screen, jackpot end screen, start screen for ART or AT, continuation screen, and end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. It is determined. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game is set stepwise according to the number of specific conditions established in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period. Information for estimating the value is displayed, and it has a playability that makes it difficult to guess or recognize the game set value. Therefore, suggesting or specifying game setting values as in the present embodiment is fundamentally different from what has been conventionally employed in gaming machines such as slot machines.

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the game setting values can be estimated or confirmed, it is necessary to estimate the game setting values to narrow down the game setting values to a plurality of game setting values, or to use more game balls to recognize the game setting values. It is necessary to enter 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, and the hurdle is high until the game setting value can be guessed or recognized. Therefore, there is an advantage for the game hall that the game set values are not easily known to the players. On the other hand, the player has the advantage of being able to guess or recognize game setting values. In addition, it is possible to guess or recognize the game setting value on the condition that the jackpot lottery is won, and the accuracy of guessing the game setting value is increased by the continuation of the probability variable jackpot. Depending on the situation, the gaming machine 10 can be provided with a game property that the game setting value can be recognized. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

Also, when a jackpot game is started, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there are special circumstances, and the game is not ended during the high probability mode when the high probability mode is set. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the first winning jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even if a player who does not know the timing (the end of the predetermined period) at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized progresses the game, the game can be played immediately before the game set value can be estimated or recognized. is prevented from terminating. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the game set value can be estimated or recognized can estimate or recognize the game set value. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play games aiming at timings at which game set values can be guessed or recognized.

In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start time of the jackpot game for the first time, not only is it necessary to win the jackpot at least once before the game setting value can be estimated or recognized, but even if the predetermined period is over. Even if it is started, a considerable number of game balls 99 are shot to the game board 31 until the game setting values are guessed or recognized to some extent because the hurdles to guessing or recognizing the game setting values are high as described above. And you will receive a considerable number of jackpot lotteries. Therefore, at the stage of estimating or recognizing game set values with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the number of unit jackpot lotteries (ease of receiving a jackpot lottery) can be sufficiently determined. As a result, when the player can guess or recognize the game setting value with high accuracy, the player can determine the ball output performance of the gaming machine 10 during the game including not only the game setting value but also the number of lotteries for the unit jackpot. , it becomes possible to determine whether to continue the game. For example, even if the game set value is low, if the unit jackpot lottery number of times is large, it is possible to make a decision to continue the game by comprehensively considering it. On the other hand, even if the game set value is high, if the unit jackpot lottery number of times is small, it is also possible to give up the continuation of the game by considering comprehensively.

In the present embodiment, when the first hit is a variable probability jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first hit jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode, One predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is the first hit or the jackpot consecutive hits. In this case, the predetermined period starts when the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode starts, and ends when the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode ends. In addition, every time a predetermined period ends, segments A to G corresponding to the number of special out balls are set as control objects on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled once for each jackpot game. can be In this case, the lighting segment of the 7-segment display unit 39 may be extinguished at the end of the jackpot game, or if the first hit is a variable probability jackpot, the normal jackpot is won, and the normal jackpot game ends seven times. The displayed state of the segment display section 39 may be maintained. When a predetermined period is set one by one for one big win, and if the first win is a variable probability big win, the special A number of segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) entered into the out ball mouth 373 may be added and controlled. That is, when the first hit is a variable probability jackpot, the special out balls are accumulated for each jackpot game from the jackpot game for the first hit to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game, and each jackpot game. Segments A to G corresponding to the number of special out balls accumulated in 1 may be controlled.

In this embodiment, a part or all of other information may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 instead of or in addition to the game set values. Other information includes, for example, profit information relating to the player's profit status in the progress of the game. As this profit information, for example, performance information indicating the ball output performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 and expected ball output value (for example, the total number of game balls fired when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are hit) In addition to the ratio of the expected number of balls (number of game balls paid out) to (total number of out balls)), the latent probability variation, the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (for example, the probability variable jackpot, normal Jackpot (time-saving mode transition jackpot)), falling to low probability mode at the time of latent probability change, etc.

Regarding performance information and expected ball output, it is the ending of the normal jackpot game, the latent probability variation and the fall to the low probability mode is the variable game, and the jackpot type is the jackpot game, and the profit information is part or all of the 7 segments. It may be displayed on the display unit 39 . Also, when part or all of the profit information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a variable game, when a specific condition different from the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 is satisfied, one of the profit information is satisfied. Some or all of them are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . Specific conditions in this case include, for example, that the jackpot lottery number of times or the normal pattern lottery number of times reaches a specific number of times after shifting to a variable game. Also, in the variable game, when the latent probability change and the fall from the latent probability change to the low probability mode are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as profit information, until the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the latent probability change becomes a big hit, or from the latent probability change The time period until the fall is a predetermined period for determining whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

However, the profit information to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is not information that can be grasped by another opportunity, except for the case where it is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when a specific condition is satisfied. It is preferable that the profit status cannot be grasped. Examples of the former include, for example, a jackpot type in a jackpot lottery, a latent probability change, and its fall. The latter example includes performance information indicating the ball payout performance based on the prize winning openings 313-316 and expected ball payout values.

Here, when part or all of the performance information indicating the ball payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the player may notice, for example, individual differences in manufacturing the gaming machine 10 and aging. It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance of the winning ports 313 to 316 among the gaming machines due to changes or the like. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning ports 313 to 316, and when the ball payout performance based on the prize winning ports 313 to 316 can be grasped, the game being played is based on the performance information. An opportunity is provided to decide whether to continue playing on machine 10 .

Here, the performance information indicating the performance of winning balls 313 to 316 includes unit jackpot lottery frequency information, base information, continuous role ratio information, role ratio information, and the like.

The number of unit jackpot lotteries is an index indicating the ease of receiving a jackpot lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode), so part or all of the unit jackpot lottery number information is 7 segments. By being displayed on the display unit 39, it is possible to know how easy it is to receive a big winning lottery. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the unit jackpot lottery frequency, and when the unit jackpot lottery frequency can be grasped, based on the unit jackpot lottery frequency, it is determined whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game. given the opportunity to do so.

Since the base information is an index indicating the ease of winning the first prize winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313, a part or all of the base information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 to display the first winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313. It is possible to know how easy it is to win a prize in the prize winning port 314 and the general prize winning port 313 . As a result, the player enjoys guessing the base, and if the base can be grasped, the player is provided with an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine currently being played based on the base.

The continuous accessory ratio information is the frequency with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state (remaining ratio of the jackpot game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning port 316 (in the special game state It is an index that shows the ball payout rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the continuous role ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the continuous role ratio, so that the lottery result of the big win lottery shifts to the big win game state. It is possible to know the frequency of winning prizes and the ease of winning prizes to the variable prize winning port 316 . As a result, the player guesses the continuous role ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous role ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous role ratio. given the opportunity to do so.

Accessory ratio information is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state (stay rate in jackpot gaming state), stay rate in high-frequency support mode receiving support from electric accessory 315b, and variable It is an index that indicates the ease of winning a prize to the winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315 (ball output rate in the jackpot game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the role ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the role ratio, so that the lottery result of the big win lottery will shift to the big win gaming state. It is possible to know the frequency, the rate of staying in the high-frequency support mode receiving the support of the electric accessory 315b, and the ease of winning the variable winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315. As a result, the player has an opportunity to enjoy guessing the character ratio and, if the character ratio can be grasped, to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

On the other hand, when the expected ball payout value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, in addition to the ball payout performance based on the game set values, the state of the nails driven into the game board 31 and the surface properties of the game board 31 are considered. It is possible to evaluate the ball output performance. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance more appropriately. Also, the expected ball output value may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a filling rate for the borderline.

Further, the stopper portion 383 may be omitted, and the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying. In this case, the number of special out balls may be counted until the predetermined period is over, and after the predetermined period is over, the number of segments A to G corresponding to the number of special out balls may be controlled, and the special out ball is detected by the special out ball sensor. Segments A to G may be controlled in the order according to the control order pattern type each time they are detected by 384 . In the former case, the predetermined period is a specific condition, but in the latter case, the entry of the game ball into the special out ball opening 373 (or the detection of the special out ball by the special out ball sensor 384) is the specific condition. becomes.

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the crew device 37 having the special out ball opening 373 that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and the game ball retention section 38 are provided in the right area of the game board 31, and the ball enters the variable winning opening 316 during a predetermined period. Then, on the condition that the game ball is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the number of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is controlled. Thus, the case where part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each time a game ball exceeding the upper limit number ("9" in this embodiment) enters the variable winning opening in the round game in the opening and closing execution mode (on the condition that so-called over winning occurs) ), and the segments of the 7-segment display section are controlled in the order according to the control order pattern type, which is different from the above-described first embodiment. In other words, the conditions (specific conditions) under which the segments of the 7-segment display are to be controlled are not limited to passing the game ball through a specific area such as the special out ball opening 373 .

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, on the condition that the variable winning port is over-winning, the number of segments of the 7-segment display section corresponding to the number of over-winning in a predetermined period is controlled. The croon device 37 and the game ball retention portion 38 in the embodiment are not required. As a result, while simplifying the configuration of the game machine 10, it is possible to enjoy the effects of the above-described first embodiment.

In addition, when over-winning occurs, the player can obtain a greater profit than the profit obtained by winning the upper limit number of game balls entering the variable winning slot, so the segment is subject to control under the condition of over-winning. As a result, the player is provided with an opportunity to guess or recognize the game setting value in addition to the profit as an over-win, and the over-win is given to the player with a larger profit. That is, this is an example of an example in which the higher the profit earned by the player, the higher the possibility that the specific condition will be met.

41 to 43, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Since this embodiment has the above-described differences from the above-described first embodiment, the procedures of command determination processing, jackpot game effect processing, and game setting value display processing are different from those of the above-described first embodiment. different.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002) of this embodiment, a command received from the main controller 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In this embodiment, since the game ball retention section 38 is omitted, the special out-ball detection command is not set, so the step of determining whether or not the received command is the special out-ball detection command. is omitted.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the command determination process in this embodiment, after executing the processes of steps S2101 to S2112 similar to the command determination process in the first embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is It is determined whether or not it is a variable winning opening winning command (step S2401). Then, when the received command is a variable winning opening winning command (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variable winning opening winning flag to ON (step S2402), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a variable winning opening winning command (step S2401: No), the processing of steps S2115 to S2121 similar to the command determination processing in the first embodiment described above is executed, and the command determination processing is executed. finish.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) of the secondary timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, the opening effect, ending effect and opening/closing execution mode effect determined in step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 41 are executed. be done. Here, FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 42, in step S2501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2108 in the command determination process of FIG. When the start flag is ON (step S2501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2502, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is OFF (step S2501: No), the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2502), executes opening effect start processing (step S2503), and executes the jackpot game Terminate the production process. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process in step S2107 of the command determination process in FIG. An opening effect start command is transmitted for causing the pattern display part 341 to start an image effect as an opening effect. As a result, an image corresponding to the opening effect is displayed in the pattern display section 341 .

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag set to ON in step S2310 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to ON. (Step S2504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2505, and when the round game start flag is off (step S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2508.

<Steps S2505 to S2507>
When the round game effect start flag is ON (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to OFF (step S2505), executes round game effect start processing (step S2506), and further rounds A game running flag is set to ON (step S2507), and the jackpot game effect processing is terminated. Here, in the round game effect start processing of step S2506, the MPU 51 determines the round game effect in the corresponding round in the open/close execution mode effect scenario determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 in the command determination process of FIG. is executed in the speaker 26 and the electric decoration unit 27, and a round game start command is transmitted to the display control device 6 to cause the pattern display unit 341 to start the image effect as the round game effect in the corresponding round. This round game start command includes round number information indicating the number of rounds. As a result, in the symbol display section 341, an image corresponding to the round game effect of the round is displayed.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag, which is set to ON in step S2112 in the command determination process of FIG. 41, is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2509 when the round game effect end flag is on (step S2508: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2511 when the round game effect end flag is off (step S2508: No). .

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
When the round game effect end flag is ON (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to OFF (step S2509), sets the round game execution flag to OFF (step S2510), The jackpot game presentation process is terminated.

<Step S2511>
In step S2511, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag that is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to ON. ), the process proceeds to step S2512, and when the ending start flag is off (step S2511: No), the process proceeds to step S2514.

<Step S2512>
When the ending start flag is ON (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 51 executes ending effect start processing (step S2512), and ends the jackpot game effect processing. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 executes the ending effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the image effect as the ending effect is transmitted to the pattern display unit 341.例文帳に追加As a result, the symbol display section 341 displays an image corresponding to the basic effect of the ending.

<Step S2513>
In step S2513, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game effect end flag set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to ON, and if the jackpot game effect end flag is ON ( Step S2513: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2514, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2513: No), the jackpot game effect process ends.

<Steps S2514 and S2515>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2513: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2514), executes the ending effect end process (step S2515), and executes the jackpot game Terminate the production process.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the game setting value display processing (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt processing, segment A to be controlled in the 7 segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls that have won over the variable winning opening 316 in the round game in the opening and closing execution mode. Lighting and extinguishing of ∼G are controlled. Here, FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game set value display process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 43, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON at step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, if the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and if the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No ), and the process proceeds to step S2605.

<Step S2602>
When the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game running flag set to ON in step S2507 of FIG. 42 is set to ON. (Step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the timing is such that the variable winning opening 316 is open and over winning at the variable winning opening 316 can occur. Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2603 when the round game running flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), and when the round game running flag is set to OFF (step S2602 : No), the game set value display process is terminated.

<Step S2603>
When the round game in-execution flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variable winning opening winning flag set to ON in step S2402 in the command determination processing of FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2603). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 based on the variable winning opening winning flag. Here, if the variable winning opening winning flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2604, and if the variable winning opening winning flag is set to OFF (step S2603 : No), the game set value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2604 to S2606>
When the variable winning opening winning flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the variable winning opening winning counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2604), and sets the variable winning opening winning flag. It is set to off (step S2605). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the variable winning opening winning counter after the addition exceeds the upper limit of the winning number of game balls for closing the variable winning opening 316 (step S2606). Here, when the value of the variable winning opening winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2606, and the value of the variable winning opening winning counter does not exceed the upper limit number. If so (step S2606: No), the game set value display process is terminated.

<Step S2607>
When the value of the variable winning opening winning counter exceeds the upper limit (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the over winning counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2607), and performs the game set value display process. exit. The over winning counter is referred to for determining the number of segments to be controlled in the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. 44 which will be described later.

<Step S2608>
If the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of the command determination process in FIG. 41 is set to ON. is determined (step S2607). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to display part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values on the 7-segment display section 39 by means of the 5R normal jackpot flag. Here, when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2608: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2609, and when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2608: No ), the game set value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2609 and S2610>
When the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag , 16R probability variable jackpot flag) is set to OFF (step S2609). Then, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display section control process for controlling the lighting state of the 7-segment display section 39 (step S2610). The 7-segment display section control processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[7-segment display section control processing]
In the 7-segment display section control processing of this embodiment, instead of the value of the special out ball counter (see FIG. 39) of the 7-segment display section control processing in the first embodiment, the game set value display of FIG. The number of segments A to G to be controlled in the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the value of the over winning counter added in step S2607 in the process. Here, FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display section control process executed at step S2610 in the game set value display process of FIG.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 44, the jackpot game effect end flag that is set to ON at step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. If the segment display flag is set to ON (step S2302: No), the value of the over winning counter incremented in step S2606 is acquired (step S2701), and step S2606 in the game set value display process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the value of the over winning counter added in is 0 (step S2702).

<Step S2703>
When the value of the over winning counter is 0 (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2305), and selects the control order pattern type selected according to this game setting value. After selecting the control order pattern type based on the selection table (see FIGS. 40(B) and 40(C)) (step S2306), the value of the over winning counter acquired at step S2701 and the game at step S2306 Each segment A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled based on the control order pattern type selected according to the set value. Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the over-winning counter (step S2703), sets the 7-segment display flag to ON (step S2309), and ends the 7-segment display section control process.

By the way, in order to save the number of game balls to be launched in the interval between round games in the jackpot game, there is a so-called technique of stopping the launch of game balls in the interval. When performing such a stop shot, the player repeatedly launches and stops launching the game ball while counting the number of game balls winning the variable winning opening 316 in the round game. Therefore, the player pays attention to the variable winning opening 316 while hardly checking the symbol display portion 341 in the round game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when an over-win occurs in a round game (excluding the final round) in the open/close execution mode, a ball payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game next to the round game in which the over-win has occurred. be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who performs the stopping shot launch an extra game ball for generating an over-win, and it is possible to draw attention to the symbol display part 341 in the round game. In particular, since a player who performs stop shots has a strong tendency to emphasize ball output performance as a criterion for selecting the gaming machine 10, in order to draw attention to the symbol display section 341, the game is set to the 7-segment display section 39 with over winning. It is very significant to display part or all of the numerical value corresponding to the value.

Further, in this embodiment, when part or all of the numbers indicating the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 due to over winning, the crew device 37 and the game ball retention section 38 in the first embodiment described above are replaced. Can be omitted. As a result, this embodiment is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

By the way, in this embodiment, the special condition is established when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game, such as over-winning of the game ball 99 to the variable winning opening 316 . Certain events are triggered by the player receiving a profit, for example, winning a profit that exceeds the expected value of a normal profit, winning a jackpot, and the like. That is, the greater the profit won by the player, the higher the probability that the specific condition will be met. The special conditions established in this way include the following, in addition to the over winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot game.

(1) When the number of consecutive jackpot hits exceeds a predetermined number of times Since the jackpot game wins the game ball 99 by entering the game ball into the variable prize winning port 316, the higher the number of consecutive jackpot hits, the more likely the player is to win. greater profits can be earned. Then, if a specific condition is established when the number of consecutive jackpots exceeds a predetermined number of times, it is possible not only to expect the consecutive jackpots from the aspect of simply obtaining balls, but also to obtain benefits such as information on game setting values. The game can be enjoyed with the expectation of being able to guess information or acquire recognizable information.
In this case, the predetermined number of times may be set as appropriate, but is determined based on, for example, the probability variable entry rate or the probability variable continuation rate, and may be determined as the expected value of the number of times the jackpot runs. Specifically, the predetermined number of times includes the average number of consecutive jackpots regardless of the type of jackpot, and the average average number of consecutive jackpots when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the probability variable jackpot is 75%, and the distribution rate of the normal jackpot is 25% (see FIG. 14 (C)). The predetermined number of times) is 4 times, and the average jackpot consecutive number of times (predetermined number of times) is 5 times when the first hit is a variable probability jackpot.
Also, the predetermined number of times may be one. In other words, a specific condition may be established each time the jackpot series continues.
In addition, if the predetermined number of times is not one time, the specific condition after the specific condition is first met may be satisfied when the jackpot succession continues for a predetermined number of times, or the specific condition may be satisfied when the jackpot succession continues for a predetermined number of times. It may be established when the jackpot succession continues for a specific number of times (for example, once) different from the predetermined number of times when the condition (1) is established.

(2) When the number of balls released during the jackpot series exceeds the predetermined number of balls Since the jackpot game is to win the game ball 99 by entering the game ball into the variable winning hole 316, the variable winning hole 316 The greater the number of game balls entered, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. Then, if a specific condition is established when the number of balls released during the jackpot series exceeds a predetermined number of balls, expectations for the jackpot series are not limited to mere winning of balls, but the game set value You can enjoy the game, including the expectation that you can acquire information that allows you to guess or recognize profit information such as information about.
In this case, the predetermined number of balls may be set as appropriate, but for example, the probability variable entry rate, the probability variable continuation rate, the round number distribution, the number of prize balls in the variable winning opening 316, the upper limit number (count number) of closing the variable winning opening 316 etc., and may be determined as the expected value of the number of balls released during the jackpot.
The expected value of the number of balls to be released during the jackpot series may be the expected value of the number of released balls regardless of the type of the jackpot, or the expected value of the number of released balls when the first win is a variable probability jackpot.
A specific condition may be established when the difference number of balls during the jackpot series exceeds a predetermined number of balls instead of the number of balls released during the jackpot series.

(3) When the number of balls released in the high-probability mode exceeds the predetermined number of balls In the high-probability mode, not only is the probability that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a big win, but also whether or not to operate the electric accessory 315b. There is a high probability that the lottery result in the normal figure lottery will be a hit. Therefore, in the high-probability mode, the electric accessory 315b is operated at a high frequency by normal game hits, so that many game balls 99 can enter the second winning hole 315. FIG. Therefore, the longer the staying period in the high-probability mode (the greater the number of lotteries in the lottery per normal pattern), the greater the number of game balls 99 that can be obtained in the high-probability mode (outgoing balls). On the other hand, players tend to dislike being hooked in the high-probability mode and desire to win a jackpot lottery in a short stay period in the high-probability mode. If a specific condition is satisfied when the number of balls released in the high-probability mode exceeds a predetermined number of balls, profit information such as game setting values can be guessed or recognized by addiction in the high-probability mode. Increases the likelihood of obtaining available information. Therefore, even a player who dislikes addiction in the high-probability mode can obtain a benefit different from the acquisition of the game ball 99 by addiction, so that the dislike of addiction is alleviated.
In this case, the predetermined number of balls may be set as appropriate, but for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode (average number of draws between jackpots), the probability of winning a normal pattern, the number of prize balls of the second winning port 315, the opening time, etc. and calculated from the average value of the number of jackpot lotteries (number of games between jackpots) required to win the jackpot lottery in the high-probability mode.
However, the specific condition is set when the number of balls released in the high probability mode exceeds the predetermined number of balls, so that the game ball 99 can be continuously launched without using special techniques such as stopping shots. , It is preferable to apply when the expected ball output value calculated from the average value of the number of games played during the jackpot is positive (when the number of balls output increases in the game between the jackpots). Typically, a small winning lottery is performed in a high probability mode in which a small amount of game balls can be acquired, and the gaming machine 10 wins the small winning lottery with a high probability, or a small amount of games with a high probability in a big winning lottery. This is applied to a game machine 10 that wins a small prize that can win a ball. In addition, it is conceivable that a small hit can be won with a limited high probability in a high-probability mode that shifts after a specific type of probability-variable jackpot game such as a 16R probability-variable jackpot is finished.
A specific condition may be established when the difference number of balls in the high-probability mode exceeds a predetermined number of balls instead of the number of balls put out in the high-probability mode.
In addition, in the gaming machine 10 that wins a small win with a high probability in the high probability mode, a specific condition may be established each time the number of small wins in the game between the big wins reaches a predetermined number. In this case, the predetermined number of times may be set as appropriate, but is determined based on, for example, the probability of a big hit in the high probability mode (average number of lotteries between big hits), the probability of a small hit, etc., and the average number of small hits in the high probability mode. can be considered.

(4) When a combination of main symbols stop-displayed in the symbol display section 341 is a combination of specific symbols. be. For example, in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined when the number is 7, and the probability variable jackpot of either the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot is confirmed when the number is 3, and 3 and 7 In addition, in the case of the double order, any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 5R normal jackpot is confirmed, and in the case of the open order that is not the double order, the loss is confirmed. That is, since the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341 suggests or clearly indicates the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain, as a special condition, a combination of the main symbols with which the player can obtain a large profit is set. (For example, 3 or 7 consecutive eyes) may be set to be displayed still.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

[Third embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, on the condition that the game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 in a predetermined period and enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the special out ball in the predetermined period A case has been described in which a part or all of the numerical value corresponding to the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by making the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the number to be controlled. .

On the other hand, this embodiment is similar to the above-described first embodiment in that the game set value is suggested or specified on the condition that a game ball is entered into the special out ball opening 373 for a predetermined period of time. This embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the game setting values are suggested or specified as alphabets on the 7-segment display section 39 . In other words, profit information such as game set values set on the game hall side can be configured to be indirectly displayed by alphabets instead of being directly displayed by numerical values.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game setting values are indirectly displayed in alphabetical characters, making it more difficult for the player to guess or recognize the game setting values than in the first embodiment. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being prematurely guessed or recognized by the player, and as a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

45 and 46, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 45(A) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between alphabets displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment and game setting values, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the lighting or light extinction state of each segment, and a display alphabet. In addition, the parenthesis on the right side of the alphabet in FIG. 45(B) indicates the game set value.

As shown in FIG. 45(A), when the number of over-winning game balls generated in the variable winning opening 316 in a predetermined period is 7 or more, when the game set value is 1, segments A to C, E to When the game setting value is 2, the alphabet letter A is displayed, and when the game setting value is 2, the alphabet letter B is displayed by lighting all the segments A to G, and when the game setting value is 3, the segment is displayed. When the game setting value is 4, the alphabet D is displayed by lighting the segments A to F, and when the game setting value is 5. When the segments D to G are lit, the letter E is displayed, and when the game set value is 6, the segments A and E to G are lit, and the letter F is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 45(B), the control state (power supply (lighting) or cutoff (lighting out)) of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to alphabets A to F displayed as game set values is displayed. is shown. The player selects alphabets (game setting values) displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on whether the segments A to G to be controlled are lit or unlit according to the number of special out balls. can be inferred. For example, when power is supplied to segment A and segment A is turned on, it is one of alphabets A to F (game setting values 1 to 6), and segment A is turned off when power to segment A is cut off. Since there is no corresponding alphabet (game set value) when the segment is turned off, the alphabet (game set value) cannot be determined from the lighting or extinguishing of the segment A alone. Similarly, in the case of segments E and F alone, the alphabet (game set value) cannot be determined from the lighting or extinguishing. On the other hand, when the power is supplied to the segment B and the segment B is lit, it can be determined that it is one of the alphabets A, B and D (game setting values 1, 2 and 4), and the power to the segment B is determined. is cut off and the segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is one of alphabets C, E and F (game set values 3, 5 and 6). Similarly, in the case of segments C, D and G alone, it is possible to infer (narrow down) alphabets (game set values) from lighting or extinguishing. Further, it is possible to more accurately determine the game set values displayed as alphabetic characters depending on which of the plurality of segments A to G is in the lit state or in the extinguished state, and the number of segments to be controlled is large. The game setting value can be determined more accurately as much as possible, and the game setting value can be recognized by controlling all of at least seven segments A to G. Also, depending on the game set value and the control order, the game set value can be recognized before all of the seven segments A to G are controlled.

In this way, even when the game setting values are displayed in alphabetical characters on the 7-segment display section 39, the same game setting values as in the above-described first embodiment are displayed using numbers. The ease of estimating the value itself and the easiness of judging whether the game set value is high or low by itself are different, and the easiness of estimating the game set value or its height in combination with other segments are different. Therefore, the easiness of guessing the game set values differs depending on the order in which the segments are controlled. In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the segments A to G are to be controlled in the order according to the pattern selected from a plurality of control order patterns predetermined for each game set value. (See FIGS. 46(A) and 46(B)).

Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the control order pattern type selection table used in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. Specifically, FIG. 46A is a control order pattern type selection table for the game set value 1, and FIG. 46B is a control order pattern type selection table for the game set value 1. FIG. Although control order pattern type selection tables for game set values 2 to 4 are omitted, as shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, seven control order pattern type selection tables are set for each game set value. It is This control order pattern type selection table is a table for determining the priority of which of the segments A to G in the 7-segment display section 39 is to be lit. is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(A), when the game setting value is 1, the control target up to the third stage is a combination of segments A, E, and F, as in patterns A1 to F1. Therefore, even if the segments A, E, and F are lit, it cannot be determined which of the game set values is 1 to 6.

Further, when segment G is set as the object to be controlled in the fourth stage and segment G is lit, that is, when segments A, E, F, and G are lit, the 7-segment display section 39 displays the letter F. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is one of 1, 2, 5, and 6. Then, when the control target is the segment D in the fifth stage, the segment D is not lit (because the light-out state is maintained), so the game set values cannot be narrowed down from 1, 2, 5, and 6. Can not.

Further, when the control object is segment B or C in the sixth step and segment B or C is turned on, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1 or 2 because the alphabet is assumed to be A or B. . Then, when the segment B or C is set as the control object in the 7th step and the segment B or C is lit, it can be recognized that the letter A is completed and the game set value is 1.

On the other hand, in the pattern G1 when the game setting value is 1, when the control object is the segment G in the first step and the segment G is lit, the character is any of alphabet A, B, E, or F, so the game is executed. It can be determined that the set value is one of 1, 2, 5, and 6. Further, when the segments A, E, and F are controlled in the second to fourth stages and the segments A, E, and F are lit, the game set values cannot be narrowed down from 1, 2, 5, and 6. Can not.

Then, when the control target is the segment D in the fifth stage, the segment D is not lit (because the light-out state is maintained), so the game set values cannot be narrowed down from 1, 2, 5, and 6. Can not. However, since there is no unlit segment for alphabet B, 2 is negated as the game set value because it is not alphabet B when four segments A, E to G are lit on the fifth row. Therefore, it can be determined that the game set value is one of 1, 5, and 6.

In addition, when the segment B or C is lit as the control object in the sixth step, since the segment B or C is not lit, the game setting values 5 and 6 are negated because they are not alphabetic characters E and F. It can be recognized that the game set value is 1 before the segment at the stage becomes the control object.

As shown in FIG. 46(B), when the game set value is 6, unlike the case where the game set value is 1, the segments B, C, and D are given the same priority. This is because the segments B, C, and D do not light up when they are all controlled, so the game set values can be narrowed down regardless of the order in which these segments B, C, and D are controlled. This is because

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . However, when the game setting values are displayed numerically on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is easy for the player to guess the game setting values. There is concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 will drop.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, part or all of the alphabet corresponding to the game setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . Therefore, compared to the case where part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it becomes more difficult for the player to guess the game setting values, and interest in the game can be acquired early. In addition, the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 with a low game set value is suppressed from decreasing.

When the game setting values are associated with alphabets, they do not need to be associated with A to F, and may be associated with other alphabets. Also, one game setting value may correspond to a plurality of alphabets. For example, the game set value 1 may correspond to alphabets A and G, and the game set values 2 to 6 may be similarly selected from a plurality of alphabets. Also, instead of alphabets, game setting values may correspond to symbols. Also, game setting values may correspond to alphabets, numbers, and symbols. For example, when the game setting value is 1, either the number 1 or the alphabet A may be selected, and the game setting values 2 to 6 may be similarly selected from the corresponding alphabets and numbers. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, on the condition that the game ball 99 enters the variable winning hole 316 in a predetermined period and the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, a special out in a predetermined period A case will be explained where some or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, the number of which corresponds to the number of balls. did.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the condition that a game ball is entered into the special out ball opening for a predetermined period, a game setting indicating a game set value is provided according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in a predetermined period. This differs from the first embodiment in that a value display face image (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "face image") is displayed in the pattern display section. In other words, the profit information related to game setting values is not limited to being displayed on the 7-segment display unit, and may be displayed on other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, and is composed of a plurality of parts. It can also be configured to be indirectly displayed as an image such as a face image.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the game set values are displayed as face images in the symbol display section, there is no need to provide the 7-segment display section 39 as in the first embodiment. As a result, while simplifying the configuration of the game machine 10, it is possible to enjoy the effects of the above-described first embodiment. In addition, since the game setting value is indirectly displayed by the face image composed of a plurality of parts, the game setting value can be guessed or recognized by the player earlier than in the above-described first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the game machine.

47 to 54, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Since this embodiment has the above-described differences from the first embodiment, the display mode of the game set values and the procedure of the game set value display process are different from those of the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 47A is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen in a jackpot game on the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 47(A), in this embodiment, the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed up to the step corresponding to the number of special out balls on the ending screen of the normal jackpot game. In this embodiment, the entire face image is displayed in step 7, and a part of the face image is displayed step by step in steps 1 to 6 (see FIGS. 48 to 52). Here, part or all of the face image is displayed on the ending screen of the normal jackpot game because, as described in the first embodiment, the end of the predetermined period for retaining the number of special out balls is usually This is because it is reasonable to display part or all of the face image on the ending screen for the normal jackpot when setting the end point of the opening/closing execution mode for the jackpot.

Here, FIG. 47(B) is a diagram showing an example of the game set value display face image display order (correspondence relationship between the number of special out balls and display parts). As shown in FIG. 47(B), the facial image is displayed in seven stages from steps 1 to 7. As described above, the entire facial image is displayed in step 7, and a part of the facial image is displayed in steps 1 to 6. displayed step by step. Step 1 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is 1, and in step 1 the outline of the face image is displayed. Step 2 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is 2, and in step 2 the ears of the facial image are displayed. Step 3 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is 3, and in step 3 the nose of the face image is displayed. Step 4 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is 4, and step 4 displays the mouth of the face image. Step 5 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is 5, and in step 5 the hair (with or without a hat) in the face image is displayed. Step 6 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is 6, and in step 6 the eyebrows of the face image are displayed. Step 7 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is 7 or more, and in step 7 the eyes of the face image are displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the parts of the face image are sequentially displayed step by step in a fixed order according to the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball mouth 373 . It should be noted that the contents displayed in steps 1 to 3 are common to all game set values, and it is not possible to determine which of the game set values 1 to 6 is up to step 3. On the other hand, in steps 4 to 7, the parts of the face image are displayed with the display contents selected according to the game setting values from among the plurality of display contents. Specifically, as will be described later, in step 4, the mouth is displayed as either open or closed, and in step 5, a face image with only hair added or a hat with hair added is displayed. In step 6 the eyebrows are displayed as either raised or drooping, and in step 7 the eyes are displayed as either open or closed. In steps 4 to 7, the mouth, hair, eyebrows, and eyes are displayed with display contents selected from two types of display contents. The number of selectable display contents in 4 to 7 need not be the same.

Here, FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between game setting values and face images. As shown in FIG. 48, 16 face images A to P having common contours, ears and noses and different at least one of mouth, hair (with or without a hat), eyebrows and eyes are set. A plurality of face images are associated with each set value. Specifically, face images A to C are associated with game setting value 1, face images D to F are associated with game setting value 2, and face image G is associated with game setting value 3. to I are associated, game setting value 4 is associated with face images J and K, game setting value 5 is associated with face images L and M, and game setting value 6 is associated with are associated with face images N to P.

Here, FIGS. 49 to 52 are diagrams showing examples of display patterns of face images.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 52, when the number of special out balls is 1 (step 1), an image representing the contour of the face is displayed on the normal jackpot ending screen of the symbol display section 341. FIG. When the number of special out balls is 2 (step 2), an image representing the ear is displayed in addition to the image representing the outline of the face on the ending screen of the normal jackpot in the pattern display section 341 . When the number of special out balls is 3 (step 3), an image representing the nose is displayed in addition to the image representing the outline of the face and ears on the ending screen of the normal jackpot in the pattern display section 341 . As described above, steps 1-3 are common to all 16 face images A-P.

When the number of special out balls is 4 (step 4), a face image obtained by adding a mouth to the image of step 3 is displayed. Mouths are displayed as either open or closed. In the case of a face image with an open mouth added in step 4 (see FIGS. 49 and 50), it is one of the face images A, B, D, I, J, L, N, O, and at this stage the game It is not possible to determine which of the set values is 1 to 6. On the other hand, in the case of the face image to which the closed mouth is added in step 4 (see FIGS. 51 and 52), it is one of the face images C, E, F, G, H, K, M, and P, and this step Therefore, it is not possible to determine which of 1 to 6 the game set value is.

When the number of special out balls is five (step 5), a face image with only hair added to the image in step 4 or a face image with hair and a hat added is displayed. If the mouth is open in the face image to which only the hair is added in step 5 (see FIG. 49), it is one of the face images A, B, L and N, and the game set values 2, 3 and 4 are Since it is denied, it can be determined that the game set value is one of 1, 5 and 6. In step 5, in the case of a face image with only hair added, if the mouth is closed and open (see FIG. 51), it is one of the face images E, G, K and P, and the game setting values 1 and 5 are Since it is denied, it can be determined that the game set value is one of 2 to 4 and 6. In step 5, if the mouth is open in the face image with hair and hat added (see FIG. 50), it is one of face images D, J, M and O, and game setting values 1 and 3 are negative. Therefore, it can be determined that the game set value is either 2, 4-6. If the mouth is closed and open in the case of the face image to which the hat is added along with the hair in step 5 (see FIG. 52), it is one of the face images C, F, H and I, and the game setting values are 4 to 6. is denied, it can be determined that the game set value is any one of 1-3.

When the number of special out balls is 6 (step 6), a face image obtained by adding eyebrows to the image in step 5 is displayed. Eyebrows are displayed as either raised or drooping. In the case of the face image with raised eyebrows added in step 6, if the mouth is open and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 49), the face image is either face image A or N, and the game setting values are 1 and 1. 6 can be determined. In the case of the face image to which drooping eyebrows are added in step 6, if the mouth is open and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 49), the face image is either B or L, and the game setting values are 1 and 5. It can be judged that it is either In the case of the face image to which raised eyebrows are added in step 6, if the mouth is open and the person is wearing a hat (see FIG. 50), the face image is either O or M, and the game setting values are 5 and 5. 6 can be determined. In the case of the face image to which drooping eyebrows are added in step 6, if the mouth is open and a hat is being worn (see FIG. 50), the face image is either D or J, and the game setting values are 2 and 4. It can be judged that it is either In the case of the face image with raised eyebrows added in step 6, if the mouth is closed and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 51), the face image is either E or P, and the game setting values are 2 and 2. 6 can be determined. In the case of the face image to which drooping eyebrows are added in step 6, if the mouth is closed and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 51), the face image is either G or K, and the game setting values are 3 and 4. It can be judged that it is either In the case of the face image to which raised eyebrows are added in step 6, if the mouth is closed and a hat is worn (see FIG. 52), the face image is either face image C or H, and the game setting values are 1 and 1. 3 can be determined. In the case of the face image to which drooping eyebrows are added in step 6, if the mouth is closed and a hat is being worn (see FIG. 52), the face image is either F or I, and the game setting value is 2 or 3. It can be judged that it is either

When the number of special out balls is 7 or more (step 7), a face image obtained by adding eyes to the image in step 6 is displayed. Eyes are displayed as either open or closed. Then, the face image is completed by adding the eyes, and it can be determined which one of the face images A to P it is. This allows the player to recognize the game set value.

[Game setting value display processing]
In this embodiment, in the game set value display process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 is controlled as in the first embodiment. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the ending screen displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the normal jackpot ending, control is executed to display part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value. Here, FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game set value display process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 53, in the game set value display processing of this embodiment, steps S2201 to S2212 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, so that the upper and lower stopper portions 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 are movement is controlled. Further, in step S2801, face image display processing is executed to display part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value. Face image display processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[Face image display processing]
Here, FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of face image display processing executed in the game set value display processing of FIG.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 54, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the face image displaying flag is set to ON. The face image display flag is a flag indicating that part or all of the face image is being displayed, and is set to ON in step S2909, which will be described later. Here, if the face image display flag is set to ON (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the face image display process, and if the face image display flag is set to OFF (step S2901: No), the process moves to step S2902.

<Steps S2902 and S2903>
At step S2902, the MPU 51 acquires the value of the special out ball counter which is added at step S2209 in FIG. ). The value of the special out ball counter is determined by winning the variable winning hole 316 and the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period (the period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode). It is the number of special out balls that entered the ball. Then, when the value of the special out ball counter is 0 (step S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the face image display process. On the other hand, if the value of the special out ball counter is not 0 (step S2903: No), the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Steps S2904 to S2906>
In step S2904, the MPU 51 calculates the number of steps for displaying the face image based on the value of the special out ball counter (the number of special out balls) acquired in step S2902. That is, the MPU 51 determines to what stage the face image is displayed. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2905), and selects the face image type based on this game setting value (step S2906). Specifically, the MPU 51 selects a face image from face images A to C when the game setting value is 1, and selects a face image from face images D to F when the game setting value is 2. When the value is 3, a face image is selected from face images G to I. When the game setting value is 4, a face image is selected from face images J and K. When the game setting value is 5, face images L and A face image is selected from M, and when the game set value is 6, a face image is selected from face images N to P (see FIG. 48).

<Steps S2907-2309>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 a face image display command indicating the face image type determined in step S2906 and the face image display step number calculated in step S2904. As a result, the display control device 6 displays part or all of the face image up to the stage corresponding to the number of face image display steps calculated in step S2904 on the ending screen for the normal jackpot displayed on the pattern display unit 341. Let Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 (step S2908), sets the face image displaying flag to off (step S2909), and ends the face image display processing.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . However, when the game setting values are displayed numerically on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is easy for the player to guess the game setting values. There is concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 will drop.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, part or all of the face image corresponding to the game setting value is displayed on the pattern display section 341 . Therefore, compared to the case where part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it becomes more difficult for the player to guess the game setting values, and interest in the game can be acquired early. In addition, the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 with a low game set value is suppressed from decreasing.

Further, in this embodiment, since the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the pattern display section 341, there is no need to separately provide the 7-segment display section 39 as in the above-described first embodiment. Therefore, compared with the case where the 7-segment display section 39 is provided, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost, and compared with the case where the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled, the control becomes easier.

In the present embodiment, part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the ending of the normal jackpot game. is not limited to a face image, and may be another image. For example, game setting values may be indicated by images such as full-body images, animals, symbols, symbol strings, characters, character strings, numbers, and number strings. For example, as shown in FIG. 55, numerical images may be used to indicate the game set values, and as shown in FIG. 56, alphabet images may be used to indicate the game set values.

In the example shown in FIG. 55, instead of displaying numbers indicating game setting values on the 7-segment display section 39 in the first embodiment described above, part or all of a numerical image indicating game setting values is displayed on the ending screen. is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 56, instead of displaying alphabets indicating game setting values on the 7-segment display section 39 in the third embodiment, part or all of an alphabet image indicating game setting values is displayed on the ending screen. is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball that has won the variable winning hole 316 enters the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37, the symbol display section 341 displays up to the stage corresponding to the number of entering balls. A part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen, but as in the above-described third embodiment, on the condition that an over-winning occurs at the variable winning opening 316 , Part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value may be displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display section 341 up to the stage corresponding to the number of over winnings.

Also, within the applicable range, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment are possible.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, on the condition that the game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 in a predetermined period and enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the special out ball in the predetermined period A case has been described in which a part or all of the numerical value corresponding to the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by making the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the number to be controlled. .

Also, on condition that a game ball is entered into the special out ball opening 373 during a predetermined period, a face image indicating the game set value is displayed on the pattern display portion according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. 341 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the condition that a game ball is entered into the special out ball opening 373 during a predetermined period, the symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit according to the game setting value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. This differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of game setting value display images from which the game setting values that are used can be estimated or recognized is reduced. In other words, profit information such as information about game setting values is not limited to being displayed by a method of increasing (adding) the display content, but by a method of decreasing (deleting) the display content (candidates for game setting values). may be displayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the game set values are displayed in the symbol display section, there is no need to provide the 7-segment display section 39 as in the first embodiment. As a result, similar to the above-described fourth embodiment, it is possible to enjoy the effects of the above-described first embodiment while simplifying the configuration of the gaming machine. In addition, when game setting values are displayed by a method of reducing (deleting) display contents (candidates for game setting values), control of image display on the symbol display section is simplified as compared with the above-described fourth embodiment. has the advantage of being

57 to 60, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Since this embodiment has the above-described differences from the first embodiment, the display mode of the game set values and the procedure of the game set value display process are different from those of the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 57(A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in a normal jackpot game in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 57(A), in the present embodiment, on the ending screen of the normal jackpot game, a game set value image of a step corresponding to the game set value and the number of special out balls is displayed. In this embodiment, in step 6 where the number of special out balls is 5, a game set value image is displayed in which the game set value can be recognized, and in steps 1 to 5 where the number of special out balls is 0 to 4 is displayed step by step, and the larger the number of steps (the number of special out balls), the easier it is to guess the game set value (see FIG. 58).

Specifically, the game set value image is divided into six areas, and in step 1 (the number of special out balls is 0), a marine life image corresponding to the game set value is displayed in each area. A number is attached to each marine life image, and the number corresponds to a game setting value. Specifically, the marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 1 is an octopus displayed in the upper left area. The marine organism image corresponding to the game set value 2 is the porcupinefish displayed in the middle upper area. The marine life image corresponding to the game setting value 3 is a turtle displayed in the upper right area. The marine life image corresponding to the game set value 4 is a shark displayed in the lower left area. The marine life image corresponding to the game set value of 5 is the shrimp displayed in the lower middle area. The marine life image corresponding to the game set value of 6 is the anglerfish displayed in the lower right area.

In addition, in the game set value image, the number of regions corresponding to the number of special out balls makes it difficult to visually recognize the marine life image (see FIG. 58). For example, when the number of special out balls is 0 (step 1), all six marine life images are easily visible. On the other hand, when the number of special out balls is 1 (step 2), 1 image of marine life is difficult to see (5 images of marine life are easy to see), and 5 game setting values indicate actual settings. guess the value. When the number of special out balls is 2 (step 3), 2 images of marine life are difficult to see (4 images of marine life are easy to see), and the actual setting values are estimated from the 4 game setting values. become. When the number of special out balls is 3 (step 4), 3 marine life images are difficult to see (3 marine life images are easy to see), and the actual set values are estimated from the 3 game set values. become. When the number of special out balls is 4 (step 5), 4 marine life images are difficult to see (2 marine life images are easy to see), and the actual set values are estimated from the 2 game set values. become. When the number of special out balls is 5 (step 6), 5 images of marine life are difficult to see (1 image of marine life is easy to see), and the game setting value becomes recognizable.

Here, FIG. 57(B) is a diagram showing an example of the image erasing order (correspondence relationship between the number of steps (the number of special out balls) and the erasing image (the image that is difficult to see)).

As shown in FIG. 57(B), the image erasing order is defined for each game setting value, and the marine life image corresponding to the game setting value is never erased. Also, the marine organism image that is finally erased in step 6 is the marine organism image with the highest game set value. That is, the marine life image that is finally erased at the game setting values 1 to 5 is the monkfish corresponding to the game setting value 6, and the marine life image that is finally erased at the game setting value 6 is the game setting value 5. The corresponding octopus. As a result, the marine life image corresponding to the highest setting value can be left in the process up to the final step 6, so that the player can play the game expecting that the game setting value of the gaming machine 10 is the highest setting value. can enjoy.

As shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B), for example, in the case of step 1 where the number of special out balls is 0, all (6) marine life images are displayed as game setting value images. become a thing. In the case of step 2 in which the number of special out balls is 1, if the game setting value is 1, the game setting value 3 is denied because the turtle corresponding to the game setting value 3 is difficult to see, and the game setting value is 1. , 2, or 4 to 6. When the game setting value is 6, the porcupinefish corresponding to the game setting value 2 is made difficult to see, so that the game setting value 2 is denied. can be determined to be any one of 1, 3-6. In the case of step 3 where the number of special out balls is 2, when the game set value is 1, the shark corresponding to the game set value 4 is made invisible, so that the game set value 4 is further negated, and the game set value is set to 1. 1, 2, 5 and 6. When the game set value is 6, the turtle corresponding to the game set value 3 is made difficult to see, so that the game set value 3 is further negated and the game is played. It can be determined that the set value is one of 1, 4-6. In the case of step 4 where the number of special out balls is 3, when the game setting value is 1, the porcupine fish corresponding to the game setting value 2 is made difficult to see, so that the game setting value 2 is further negated, and the game setting value is set to 1. 1, 5, or 6. When the game set value is 6, the shark corresponding to the game set value 4 is made difficult to see, so that the game set value 4 is further negated. is one of 1, 5 and 6. In the case of step 5 where the number of special out balls is 4, when the game set value is 1, the shrimp corresponding to the game set value 5 is made difficult to see, so that the game set value 5 is further negated, and the game set value is changed. 1 or 6, and when the game set value is 6, the shrimp corresponding to the game set value 5 is made difficult to see, so that the game set value 5 is further negated, and the game set value is 1. and 6. In the case of step 6 where the number of special out balls is 5 or more, if the game set value is 1, the anglerfish corresponding to the game set value 6 is made difficult to see, so that the game set value 6 is further negated. is 1, and when the game setting value is 6, the octopus corresponding to the game setting value 1 is made difficult to see, so the game setting value 6 is further negated, and the game setting value is recognized as 1. can.

[Game setting value display processing]
In this embodiment, in the game set value display process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 is controlled as in the first embodiment. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the ending screen displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the normal jackpot ending, control is executed to display part or all of the game set value image indicating the game set value. Here, FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game set value display process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 59, in the game set value display processing of this embodiment, steps S2201 to S2212 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, so that the upper and lower stopper portions 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 are movement is controlled. Further, in step S3001, game setting value image display processing is executed to display a game setting value image indicating game setting values. The game set value image display processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[Game setting value image display processing]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game set value image display process executed in the game set value display process of FIG.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 60, in step S3101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game set value image displaying flag is set to ON. The game setting value image display flag is a flag indicating that the game setting value image is being displayed, and is set to ON in step S3109, which will be described later. Here, when the setting image display flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game setting value image display processing, and the game setting value image display flag is set to OFF. If there is (step S3101: No), the process proceeds to step S3102.

<Steps S3102 and S3103>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 acquires the value of the special out ball counter that is added in step S2209 of FIG. ). The value of the special out ball counter is determined by winning the variable winning hole 316 and the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period (the period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode). It is the number of special out balls that entered the ball. Then, when the value of the special out ball counter is 0 (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game set value image display processing. On the other hand, if the value of the special out ball counter is not 0 (step S3103: No), the process proceeds to step S3104.

<Steps S3104 to S3106>
In step S3104, the MPU 51 calculates the number of steps (number of steps) to make the marine life image invisible based on the value of the special out ball counter (number of special out balls) acquired in step S3102. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S3105), and selects the image erasing order according to the game setting value based on the image erasing order table (see FIG. 57B) ( step S3106). Specifically, when the game setting value is 1, the MPU 51 selects "no erasure"→"turtle"→"shark"→"porcupine fish"→"shrimp"→"monkfish" as the image deletion order, and the game is played. When the set value is 2, select "No delete" → "Turtle" → "Shark" → "Shrimp" → "Octopus" → "Monkfish". ”→“Shark”→“Shrimp”→“Octopus”→“Angelfish”, and when the game setting value is 4, select “No deletion”→“Porcupinefish”→“Turtle”→“Shrimp”→“Octopus”→ If "Monkfish" is selected and the game setting value is 5, "No erasure"->"Porcupinefish"->"Turtle"->"Shark"->"Octopus"->"Angelfish" is selected and the game setting value is 6 , select "No Erase" → "Porcupinefish" → "Turtle" → "Shark" → "Octopus" → "Shrimp".

<Steps S3107-2309>
In step S3107, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 a game set value image display command indicating the image erasing order determined in step S3106 and the number of steps calculated in step S3104. As a result, the display control device 6 causes the ending screen displayed on the pattern display unit 341 to display the game set value image in which the marine life image is rendered invisible up to the stage corresponding to the number of steps calculated in step S3104. . Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 (step S3108), sets the game setting value image displaying flag to off (step S3109), and ends the game setting value image display processing. do.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . However, when the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 by numbers, the 7-segment display portion 39 is required for displaying the numbers corresponding to the game setting values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, part or all of a plurality of marine life images corresponding to game setting values are displayed on the symbol display section 341 . Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the 7-segment display section 39 as in the first embodiment. Therefore, compared with the case where the 7-segment display section 39 is provided, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost, and compared with the case where the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled, the control becomes easier.

In the present embodiment, the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the normal jackpot game displays a game setting value image with numbers attached, but the game setting value image does not have the numbers. , or alphabets, symbols, or the like may be added instead of numbers.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball that has won the variable winning hole 316 enters the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37, the symbol display section 341 displays up to the stage corresponding to the number of entering balls. In the ending screen displayed, a marine life image indicating game setting values is displayed. You may make it display the marine life image of the number according to the pattern display part 341. FIG.

Also, within the applicable range, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment are possible.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, on the condition that the game ball enters the variable winning hole 316 in a predetermined period and enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the special out ball in the predetermined period A case has been described in which a part or all of the numerical value corresponding to the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by making the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the number to be controlled. .

Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, on the condition that a game ball is entered into the special out ball opening 373 during a predetermined period, the game setting is performed according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. The case where the game set value display face image indicating the value is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the condition that a game ball enters the special out ball port 373 during a predetermined period, the expected ball output value is calculated according to the expected ball output value and the number of special out balls in a predetermined period. This embodiment is different from the above-described first and fourth embodiments in that the shown face image of expected ball output value (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "face image") is displayed in the symbol display section 341. FIG. In other words, the profit information displayed on the display device such as the symbol display unit is not limited to the information on the game setting value, and may be other information such as the information on the expected ball output value.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by displaying the information on the expected ball payout value in the symbol display section, compared to the case where the information on the game set value is displayed as in the above-described first embodiment, In addition to the ball payout performance based on the game set values, the ball payout performance can be comprehensively evaluated in consideration of the state of the nails driven into the game board 31 and the surface properties of the game board 31 . As a result, while enjoying the pleasure of estimating the game set values, the player can enjoy estimating the overall ball payout performance of the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加In addition, since the game set values cannot be recognized, it is possible to prevent an early decrease in interest in the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 having a low game set value.

Here, the expected ball output value is, for example, the expected number of output balls (discharge game balls number). The expected value of paid out balls is 100% when the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) and the expected number of paid out balls (number of paid out game balls) are the same. number of balls) is more than 100%, and it is less than 100% when the expected number of paid-out balls (number of game balls to be paid out) is less. In other words, when the expected ball output value exceeds 100%, it is advantageous to the player, and the higher the value is, the higher the ball output performance is. On the other hand, when the expected ball output value is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the value is, the lower the ball output performance is.

In addition, the expected number of balls paid out (number of game balls paid out) is normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variable gaming state (high Probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the theoretical ratio of the jackpot game state, and the theoretical number of balls released in each game state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each game state is, for example, game setting value (jackpot probability in low probability mode and high probability mode (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)), jackpot type allocation rate ( (See FIG. 7(C)), the number of lotteries per unit jackpot, and the ratio of accessories are calculated. In addition, the number of balls to be paid out (the number of game balls to be paid out) expected in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the base, and the like. The expected number of balls (number of game balls paid out) other than the normal game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state, and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive games for the first hit, the allocation rate of the jackpot type (Fig. 7 (C)), calculated based on the number of theoretical difference balls, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc. for each jackpot type.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expected ball output value is classified into six ranks of S and A to E. Rank S has an expected ball payout value of 120% or more, Rank A has an expected ball payout value of 110% or more and less than 120%, Rank B has an expected ball payout value of 110% or more and less than 120%, and Rank C. Rank D has an expected ball payout value of 110% or more and less than 120%, and Rank E has an expected ball payout value of less than 80%.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Since this embodiment has the above-described differences from the above-described first and fourth embodiments, the sub-timer interrupt processing, the game set value display mode, and the game set value display processing procedures are the same as those described above. It differs from the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, on the ending screen of the normal jackpot game, the face image showing the game setting value is displayed up to the step corresponding to the number of special out balls. In this embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the entire face image is displayed in step 7, and a part of the face image is displayed step by step in steps 1 to 6 (see FIGS. 48 to 52). ). Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the expected payout value and the face image of the expected payout value in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, there are 16 facial images A to P as in the fourth embodiment. When the expected ball output value is rank S, one of the face images A to C is selected, and when the expected ball output value is rank A, one of the face images D to F is selected. is rank B, one of the facial images G to I is selected; Face image L or M is selected, and when the expected ball output value is rank E, one of face images N to P is selected.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device. As shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, in the game set value display processing (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt processing, counter update processing (step S2001), command determination, and the like are performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above. Processing (step S2002), variation game effect processing (step S2003) and jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) are executed. Further, in the sub-timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, instead of the game set value display processing, the expected ball output value display processing is executed (step S2005). Hereinafter, the expected ball output value display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

[Expected value display processing]
In this embodiment, in the game set value display process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 is controlled as in the first embodiment. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the ending screen displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the normal jackpot ending, control is executed to display part or all of the game set value display face image indicating the game set value. Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game set value display process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the game set value display process of this embodiment, steps S2201 to S2212 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above. movement is controlled. Further, in step S3201, the MPU 51 executes a face image display process for displaying a set value image showing the expected ball payout value up to a predetermined step. Face image display processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[Face image display processing]
Here, FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of face image display processing executed in the game set value display processing of FIG. As shown in FIG. 64, the facial image display processing of this embodiment is the same as the facial image display processing (see FIG. 54) of the fourth embodiment described above, except that the processing of steps S3301 and S3302 is the same as that described above. This is different from the face image display processing in the fourth embodiment.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
In the facial image display processing of this embodiment, when the facial image is not displayed after the opening/closing execution mode ends (step S2901: No), the facial image display step is calculated based on the value of the special out ball counter ( steps S2901 to S2904). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the expected ball output value in step S3301. As described above, the expected ball output value is calculated from, for example, game setting values, base information, continuous role ratio information, role ratio information, cumulative jackpot lottery count, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 selects the type of face image to be displayed on the ending screen based on the rank of the expected ball output value (step S3302). Further, the MPU 51 transmits a face image display command for displaying the face image on the pattern display section 341 to the display control device 6, clears the value of the special out ball counter, and sets the face image display flag to ON. (Steps S2907 to S2909), the face image display process is terminated.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . However, when the game setting values are displayed numerically on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is easy for the player to guess the game setting values. There is concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 will drop.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, part or all of the face image corresponding to the expected ball output value is displayed in the symbol display section 341 . The expected ball output value is an index reflecting the game set value, but does not indicate the game set value itself. Therefore, compared to the case where part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, when part or all of the face image indicating the expected ball output value is displayed, the game Since the setting value cannot be recognized, the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing early, and the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 with the low game setting value is prevented from decreasing.

In addition, by displaying a part or all of the face image corresponding to the expected ball payout value on the pattern display section 341, in addition to the ball payout performance based on the game set value, the number of nails driven into the game board 31 can be improved. The ball payout performance can be evaluated in consideration of the state and the surface properties of the game board 31 . As a result, while enjoying the pleasure of estimating the game set values, the player can enjoy estimating the overall ball payout performance of the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, in this embodiment, since the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the pattern display section 341, there is no need to separately provide the 7-segment display section 39 as in the above-described first embodiment. Therefore, compared with the case where the 7-segment display section 39 is provided, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost, and compared with the case where the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled, the control becomes easier.

In addition, in the present embodiment, part or all of the face image indicating the expected ball output value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the normal jackpot game. The image to be shown is not limited to the face image, and may be another image. For example, game setting values may be indicated by images such as full-body images, animals, numbers, symbols, character strings, and number strings.

Also, the expected ball output value may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as in the first embodiment. In this case, for example, alphabets or numbers indicating the rank of the expected ball output value may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, or a plurality of the 7-segment display sections 39 may be arranged so that balls are displayed on the plurality of 7-segment display sections 39. You can also display the numerical value of the expected value.

Also, the expected ball output value may be evaluated as a sufficiency rate with respect to the borderline. Here, the borderline is the number of jackpot lotteries required per unit amount (for example, 1,000 yen) in order to make the expected ball output value 100%, and this borderline is the jackpot lottery probability. It is calculated on the assumption that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In other words, the borderline is the number of jackpot lotteries per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) at which the difference ball becomes ±0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. Various methods of calculating the borderline have been proposed. For example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of rented balls at 1000 yen/(average number of balls released in the jackpot game/total probability). Here, the number of balls to be rented per 1000 yen is generally 250 balls. Also, the average number of balls released in the jackpot game is the number of balls released per jackpot game when the number of round games of the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. Also, the total probability is the average jackpot winning probability when the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode are distributed according to the theoretical values. Then, the filling rate for the borderline is calculated as a ratio between the number of unit jackpot lotteries and the borderline. If this borderline filling rate exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous to the player, and if it is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the unit jackpot lottery count is 18 times and the borderline is 20 times, the sufficiency rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball that has won the variable winning hole 316 enters the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37, the symbol display section 341 displays up to the stage corresponding to the number of entering balls. A part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen, but as in the above-described third embodiment, on the condition that an over-winning occurs at the variable winning opening 316 , Part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value may be displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display section 341 up to the stage corresponding to the number of over winnings.

Also, within the applicable range, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment are possible.

In addition, in the first to sixth embodiments, the case where the profit information related to the game set value, the expected ball payout value, etc. is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period has been described, but the profit state is displayed. As for the specific conditions for this, the following design changes are also possible.

For example, a player participation type condition can be set as the specific condition. Specifically, for example, the player is expected to predict events that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and if the player's prediction is correct, the player is provided with information that enables the player to guess or recognize profit information. It is also conceivable to provide

Here, events that can occur in the future as the game progresses include: from a specific starting point (for example, a variable game expected by the player, the opening of a jackpot game, a specific round game, a specific interval, and the ending) to a jackpot. The number of jackpot lotteries required to win (the number of games played), the jackpot type (5R normal jackpot, 5R variable jackpot, 16R variable jackpot) and when the jackpot is displayed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery after a specific starting point Types of main symbols (for example, 1 to 9) to be played, and types of effects in games executed at specific timings.

When the player is expected to predict the number of jackpot lotteries required to win the jackpot, it is difficult to accurately pinpoint the prediction. It is conceivable to make predictions from a plurality of groups such as less than or less than 100 times to less than 150 times.

In addition, as the prediction form of the production type, for example, prediction of the final individual production type of the variable game production (non-reach production, normal reach production, super reach production and special reach production), reach production is executed. Prediction of the final reach effect type (either normal reach effect, super reach effect or special reach effect) in case, notice effect type when the notice effect is executed (step up effect, rank up effect, cut-in effect and speech production). Further, the prediction form of the production type is not limited to the variable game production, and may be a prediction of the production type in the jackpot game production. For example, prediction of the type of opening effect to be executed in the opening, prediction of the type of round game effect to be executed in a specific round game, type of ending effect to be executed in the ending, etc. can be considered.

In addition, the provision of information to the player that enables the estimation or recognition of profit information is performed by the display device such as the 7-segment display section 39 and the pattern display section 341, as described above in the first to sixth embodiments, for example. can be adopted.

Further, when the player's prediction is correct, information desired by the player may be provided from a plurality of information that can be provided. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is used to provide the player with information that enables the estimation or recognition of profit information, the segments A to G to be controlled when the player's prediction is correct. It is also conceivable to allow the player to select . Segments A to G to be controlled can be selected by, for example, providing a touch panel on the front surface of the pattern display section 341, and selecting segments A to G to be controlled on the pattern display section 341 when the player's prediction is correct. By displaying such an image, it can be realized based on the player's operation on the touch panel. Further, when an image enabling selection of the segments A to G to be controlled is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, the segments A to G to be controlled can be selected by operating an operation unit such as a cross key provided on the upper plate 23 or the like. It may be selectable.

If the information desired by the player is provided from a plurality of pieces of information when the prediction is correct, the player can determine whether the game set value is high or low, and the game set value most advantageous to the player. 6, or information denying a specific game set value such as the game set value 1, which is the most disadvantageous for the player, can be selected. For example, when the game set values are displayed by numbers on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to determine whether the game set values are 5 or 6 or the game set values 1 to 4 by selecting segment B. . Specifically, when the segment B is selected and lit, it can be determined that the game set value is 1 to 4, and when it is not lit, it can be determined that the game set value is 5 or 6 (see FIG. 40(A)). ). Also, when the segment G is selected, it is possible to determine whether or not to negate the game setting value 1 (see FIG. 40(A)). Then, if the prediction is correct again after the prediction is correct, or if new information that has not been selected is selected, the accuracy of profit information estimation will be improved by combining it with previously obtained information. , or increase the likelihood of recognizing profit information. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing for the purpose of obtaining new information based on the success of the prediction. In addition, since the player can obtain the desired information based on his/her own judgment, the player determines the desired information based on his or her own criteria for whether or not to continue the game, and determines whether or not to continue the game. can be done early.

In this way, if the player is made to predict events that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and if the player's predictions come true as a specific condition, the player will be able to make predictions in variable games and jackpot games. You can enjoy whether you hit the mark or not. In addition, compared to the case where it is possible to passively guess or recognize profit information such as information on game setting values as the game progresses, the awareness of participation in the game improves and the process of guessing or recognizing profit information is improved. You can enjoy it even more.

In addition, it is also possible to make a player predict a plurality of events and provide the player with information of the number or content according to the number of events that the prediction was successful, or provide the player with the number or content of information according to the degree of difficulty of prediction. You may In this case, depending on whether the prediction is correct, it is possible to obtain a plurality of pieces of information necessary for estimating or recognizing the game setting value or information from which the game setting value can be estimated with high accuracy at once. As a result, the importance of making predictions come true is heightened, and it is necessary for players to predict events that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and to confirm whether or not their own predictions come true. can be enjoyed even more.

Also, when the player is expected to predict from a plurality of options, each option may be given odds. The odds are set, for example, according to the occurrence difficulty of the events included in the options. Specifically, for example, when predicting the final reach effect type in the variable game effect, the odds of the normal reach effect are "1", the odds of the super reach effect are "2", and the odds of the special reach effect are "3". The odds for each option are set as follows. As a result, the player can refer to the odds to grasp the degree of difficulty of occurrence of the event targeted for prediction, so that the player can enjoy making predictions with reference to the odds. When odds are given to each option and the player's prediction is correct, information corresponding to the odds can be given. For example, when providing the player with information that enables the estimation or recognition of profit information using the 7-segment display unit 39, the number of segments A to G corresponding to the odds is controlled to be lit or extinguished. is also conceivable. Specifically, when the player predicts an option with odds of 1 and hits the target, one segment becomes the control target, and when the player predicts an option with odds of 2 and hits the target, 2 segments are controlled. Three segments are controlled, and if the player guesses the option with odds of 3 and hits the target, three segments are controlled. By providing information in accordance with the odds in this way, the player can choose a choice with a high hit rate for safety because a small amount of information is sufficient, and can choose a hit with a risk to obtain a large amount of information. Players can select and enjoy options with a low rate and options with an intermediate hit rate with an intermediate amount of information without adopting safety measures or risk measures according to their own tastes and situations.

In addition, when the player predicts an event that may occur in the future, the gaming machine 10 is configured so that the expected event is determined as usual without considering the player's prediction. . In other words, the game machine 10 does not arbitrarily determine the outcome of the expected event so as to be unpredictable. never. Of course, a configuration in which the game machine 10 arbitrarily misses the prediction or hits the prediction may be adopted.

By the way, some conventional gaming machines allow a player to select a game mode from among a plurality of groups of effects to be executed in a variable game. For example, a game machine that can select a production mode from multiple production modes with different jackpot expectations (reliability) and selection rates (including 0%) for specific production such as special reach, jackpot confirmation production, and advance notice production, variation There are gaming machines that allow selection of a production mode from a plurality of production modes in which main characters and characters appearing in the game production are different. In this type of gaming machine, when the production type is set as an event that can occur in the future as the game progresses, if the production mode is changed after the production type is predicted, the player can switch to the production mode after the change. It is conceivable that there will be a situation where the expected effect does not exist, and a situation where the selection rate of the effect selected by the player differs before and after the change of the effect mode. This problem can be solved by, for example, reselecting the effect type when the effect mode is changed. Further, when there is a common individual effect type in a plurality of effect modes, by setting only such common individual effect as an option, it is possible to cope with the change of the effect mode. In addition, in the production mode after the change corresponding to the production selected in the production mode before the change, the production type is associated with each other in the production mode of the plurality of production modes, and when the production mode is changed. It is also conceivable to deal with it assuming that the presentation has been selected. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of which effect the effect selected in the effect mode before the change corresponds to in the effect mode after the change.

As another example of the player-participation-type specific condition, it is conceivable that the number of times the player makes a request to operate the operation button 20 for executing an operation effect in the gaming machine 10 reaches a predetermined number. be done. Further, it is conceivable to set as a specific condition that the number of times the operation button 20 is operated by the player reaches a predetermined number of times among the number of times the operation request of the operation button 20 is made by the player. Thus, when there is an operation request for executing the operation performance, the player can be motivated to operate the operation button 20, so that the operation button 20 is not operated and the operation performance is not executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 is other than the loop probability variable machine, it is possible to set specific conditions corresponding to the type of the gaming machine 10 . For example, in the gaming machine 10 configured as the case of the ST machine or the V-ST machine, it is possible that a specific condition is met when a jackpot lottery is won during a specific period during the ST. It is conceivable to set the specific period to, for example, a period in which ST remaining at the time of jackpot winning is large (for example, 50% or less, 40% or less, 30% or less, 20% or less, 10% or less, etc. of ST). In other words, the specific condition may be established when the big winning game is executed with a small number of variable games after the big winning game is finished. On the contrary, it is also possible to assume that a specific condition has been established when a jackpot lottery is won just before the end of the ST (for example, the remaining ST is 20% or less, 10% or less, 5% or less, etc.).

In ST machines and V-ST machines, the player is made to predict at what stage of the ST whether or not he/she will win the jackpot lottery, and when the player's prediction is correct, the profit information can be estimated or recognized. It is also conceivable to provide the player with information that enables Options in this case are, for example, when ST is 100 times, within 20 times, more than 20 times and less than 40 times, more than 40 times and less than 60 times, more than 60 times and less than 80 times, more than 80 times and less than 100 times, less than 100 times It is conceivable that the In order to make the player make a prediction, odds may be assigned to each option as described above, and information corresponding to the odds may be provided to the player.

It is also conceivable to establish a specific condition when a situation disadvantageous to the player occurs. Examples of unfavorable situations for players include the following.

(1) When the normal jackpot continues for a predetermined number of times as a result of the jackpot lottery (including once)
(2) When a jackpot (5R variable jackpot and 5R normal jackpot in this embodiment) other than the jackpot (16R variable jackpot in this embodiment) that is most advantageous to the player as a lottery result in the jackpot lottery continues for a predetermined number of times (1 times)
(3) When normal jackpots are included a predetermined number of times or more among the jackpots of the specific number of times (when the ratio of normal jackpots is a predetermined ratio or more)
(4) If the jackpot (5R variable jackpot and 5R normal jackpot in this embodiment) other than the jackpot that is most advantageous to the player (16R variable jackpot in this embodiment) among the jackpots of the specific number of times is included for a predetermined number of times or more ( If the ratio of the most advantageous jackpot is less than or equal to the predetermined ratio)
(5) When the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode are consecutively out of the predetermined number of times or more (6) When the number of difference balls in the high probability mode is less than a certain number (for example, minus difference balls) (7) When the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode are out of the predetermined number of times in a row (8) When the difference ball in the low probability mode becomes a negative difference ball more than a certain number

In addition, in the ST machine and the V-ST machine, as a disadvantageous situation for the player, if the jackpot does not occur during the ST when entering the ST, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will not enter the ST (usually) jackpot. When the predetermined number of consecutive times (including one time), when the number of remaining ST is a predetermined number or more (for example, 80 times or more, 90 times or more, etc.) (when a jackpot is elected early from the start of ST).

Further, points may be added when a disadvantageous situation occurs during a predetermined period, and profit information may be estimated or recognizable information may be provided according to the total points during the predetermined period. In this case, one disadvantageous situation may be set, or a plurality of types may be set. When a plurality of types of disadvantageous situations are set, points may be the same when each disadvantageous situation occurs, or at least some of them may be different.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In addition, in order to understand the corresponding relationship between each additional note and each embodiment, reference numerals and the like may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention related to the additional note is limited to the specific configuration attached with the reference numeral. not a thing Moreover, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.
However, it is possible to draw attention to the music output from the voice output means, and it is also possible to draw attention to the image display means in order to confirm which unit game is the unit game in which the music change has occurred. Become.

[Appendix A1]
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the display content of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the content (part or all of the profit information) displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in a predetermined period. You can have fun with whether or not certain conditions are met up to the maximum number. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix A2]
The display control means (51) is capable of displaying the profit information step by step until the profit information is recognizable, and when a specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period, the profit information of the final stage becomes recognizable. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, characterized by displaying.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2, since the profit information at the final stage is displayed on the profit information display means when the specific condition for the upper limit number is satisfied, the profit state can be recognized based on this profit information. A player who recognizes the profit status is given an opportunity to decide whether or not to continue playing with the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages caused by continuing the game on a gaming machine with a low profit status.

[Appendix A3]
The display control means (51) controls the profit information to be displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) after the predetermined period of time according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period of time. The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or appendix A2, characterized by controlling display content.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A3, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the profit state by the display contents (part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. As a result, the player can enjoy the game in anticipation of what content will be displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, wherein the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period can be recognized.

Since the gaming machine according to appendix A4 can recognize the number of times the specific condition has been satisfied in the predetermined period, the player can easily grasp the number of times the specific condition has been satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can grasp in advance that the profit information at the final stage, in which the profit state can be recognized, will be displayed on the profit information display means when, for example, it is confirmed that the specific condition is satisfied more than the upper limit number. . In addition, even if the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period does not reach the upper limit, the content displayed on the profit information display means (profit information (part of As a result, the probability of estimating the profit state increases and the enjoyment of estimating the profit state also increases, so that the playability is further improved.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to appendix A4, further comprising staying means (38) for visibly staying a number of game balls corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, it is possible to easily recognize the number of times a specific condition has been satisfied in a predetermined period by the number of game balls retained in the retaining means.

[Appendix A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, characterized in that the specific condition can be established when a game ball passes through the specific area (363).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, the specific condition can be established when the specific area is passed, so the player can easily grasp that the specific condition has been met. This allows for more fun as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, the display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A7]
It further comprises a discharge port (318, 373) for discharging to the back side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix A6, wherein the specific area is the outlet (318, 373).

[Appendix A8]
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
The discharge ports (318, 373) include a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board; a second outlet (373) different from the outlet (318);
The gaming machine according to appendix A7, wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A9]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A8, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, the display content of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of game balls entering the second discharge port into which the game balls can enter in the special game. . Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed in an inorganic manner, it is possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix A10]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316) to enter.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, the profit information is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the second discharge port into which the game balls that have passed through the variable winning port into which the game balls can enter in the special game are entered. The content of the profit information displayed on the means is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be entered into the second discharge hole by hitting the game ball into the game area and making the game ball enter the variable winning hole. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized by the display contents (part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means without requiring any special skill simply by proceeding with the special game as usual. As a result, compared to the case where a difference in skill may occur due to the game ball entering the second discharge port, it is possible to avoid playing games on the gaming machine for the reason that a difference in skill may occur. prevented.

[Appendix A11]
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix A6, wherein the specific area is at least one of the plurality of prize winning openings (313 to 316).

[Appendix A12]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The gaming machine according to appendix A11, wherein the specific area is the variable winning opening (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendices A11 and A12, the display contents of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled when a game ball enters a prize winning hole such as a variable winning hole from which prize balls are paid out. As a result, when the player obtains the profit of the prize ball, the player is provided with a game feature in which the profit can be obtained by estimating or recognizing the profit information. Therefore, compared to gaming machines in which winning balls are simply obtained by entering a game ball into a winning opening, the importance of entering a game ball into a winning opening is increased. It is possible to make the player pay attention and have an interest in the entry of the game ball into the winning hole, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix A13]
a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls;
A first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A second discharge port (373) and a third discharge port (378) different from the first discharge port (318) for discharging the game ball entering the variable winning port (316) to the back side of the game board When,
Distributing means (37) for distributing a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix A12, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means. Playability is given. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The first winning hole (314) can enter a game ball hit to the left side area of the game board (31),
The game machine according to appendix A13, wherein a game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31) can enter the variable winning hole (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, the game ball launched to the left side area of the game board can enter the first winning hole, so in order to receive the transition to the special game, it is necessary to hit so-called left. There is On the other hand, since the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board can enter the variable winning hole, it is necessary to hit right in the special game. Then, the distribution means can distribute the game balls hit to the right side area of the game board to the second discharge port. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state in the game for receiving the transition to the special game, but it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in the special game. In this way, since it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state when hitting right in a special game, etc., it is possible to give motivation to continue the game until the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to appendix A13 or appendix A14, wherein the second outlet (373) is more difficult to enter than the third outlet (378).

[Appendix A16]
The gaming machine according to appendix A15, wherein the second outlet (373) is provided above the third outlet (378).

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to appendix A15 or appendix A16, wherein the second outlet (373) has a smaller opening area than the third outlet (378).

In the gaming machines according to notes A15 to A17, it is difficult for game balls to enter the second outlet compared to the third outlet, so it is difficult to satisfy specific conditions, and it is easy to guess or grasp the profit state is not. Therefore, when the player's profit status is low, for example, when the probability of advantageous judgment is low, the player can easily understand that the probability of advantageous judgment is low, and the game on the gaming machine is stopped early. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of incidents.

[Appendix A18]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The variable winning port (316) is opened by the start of the unit game to allow entry of game balls, and is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed or when an upper limit number of game balls have entered,
The gaming machine according to appendix A12, wherein the specific condition is that game balls exceeding an upper limit number enter the variable winning hole (316).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A18, profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when there is excessive winning (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit of the variable winning opening in the unit game of the special game. In other words, profit status cannot be estimated or recognized without over-winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress the so-called stopping shot, in which the shooting of game balls is stopped at the end of the unit game or between unit games (intervals) for the purpose of reducing the number of shot game balls in the unit game of the special game.

[Appendix A19]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a starting port (314, 315) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the passage of a game ball;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A6, wherein the specific area is the starting port (314, 315).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A19, the display content of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball enters the starting hole that satisfies the determination condition for determining the transition to the special game state. be done. As a result, when the player obtains the profit that the determination condition is satisfied, the player can obtain the profit that the profit information can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which a profit can be obtained simply by satisfying the judgment condition simply by entering a game ball into the start hole, the importance of entering a game ball into the start hole is increased. By making the player pay attention to the entry of the game ball into the starting hole, the interest in the entry of the game ball into the start hole can be aroused, and the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A20]
Further comprising retention means (38) for retaining the game ball that has passed through the specific area (373) during the predetermined period and releasing the game ball after the predetermined period has elapsed,
The display control means (51) controls the profit information to be displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) after the predetermined period of time according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period of time. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A6 to A19, characterized in that display content is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A20, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the profit information by the display contents (part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. As a result, the player can enjoy the game in anticipation of what content will be displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix A21]
The staying means (38) is a movable member (383) movable between a first position (upper limit position) that restricts the movement of the game ball and a second position (lower limit position) that allows the movement of the game ball. with
The gaming machine according to appendix A20, wherein the movable member (383) is at the first position at least at the start of the predetermined period, and is at the second position at the end of the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball is retained in the retaining means and a state in which the game ball is not retained by the simple configuration and control of moving the movable member.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to appendix A20 or appendix A21, wherein the game ball held in the holding means (38) is visible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A22, since the game balls retained in the retention means are visible, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls retained in the retention means (number of specific conditions satisfied). . Therefore, when the player confirms, for example, that the number of game balls equal to or greater than the upper limit has been retained in the retention means, the player is advised in advance that the profit information at the final stage, in which the profit state can be recognized, will be displayed on the profit information display means. I can grasp it. In addition, even if the number of game balls below the upper limit is retained in the retaining means, the profit is determined based on the content displayed on the profit information display means (part of the profit information) in consideration of the number of visually recognized game balls. state can be inferred. As a result, the probability of estimating the profit state increases and the enjoyment of estimating the profit state also increases, so that the playability is further improved.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein the specific condition is established when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game.

In the gaming machine according to Addendum A23, the display contents related to profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled when a specific condition that is established by the occurrence of a specific event during a game is satisfied for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not a specific event occurs during the progress of the game. You can enjoy guessing the profit state depending on the content. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated with the occurrence of a specific event during the progress of the game, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game. .

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the specific event occurs when the player obtains a profit.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24, the display content of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when a specific event occurs when the player obtains a profit and a specific condition is satisfied. be. As a result, the player is provided with a game feature in which an additional profit is given such that profit information can be guessed or recognizable information is obtained when the player obtains a profit, and thus the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to appendix A24, wherein the specific event is triggered by the player obtaining a profit, and is generated when a new profit is obtained by obtaining the profit.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A25, the profit information display means displays when a new profit is obtained when the player obtains a profit and a specific event occurs and a specific condition is satisfied. The display content regarding profit information is controlled. As a result, when a new profit is obtained as a result of obtaining a profit, an additional profit is given by obtaining information that can be used to guess or recognize the profit information. be improved.

[Appendix A26]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A24 or appendix A25, wherein the specific event is transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A26, when the player obtains the profit of being shifted to the special game state, the display contents of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled. As a result, when the game is shifted to the special game state, the player is provided with the additional benefit of obtaining information that can be used to guess or recognize the benefit information, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Appendix A27]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The variable winning port (316) is opened by the start of the unit game to allow entry of game balls, and is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed or when an upper limit number of game balls have entered,
The gaming machine according to appendix A26, wherein the specific condition is that game balls exceeding an upper limit number enter the variable winning hole (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A27, profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when a profit of excess winning (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit of the variable winning opening is obtained in the unit game of the special game. As a result, when the profit of excessive winning in the unit game of the special game is obtained, the additional profit of obtaining information that can be guessed or recognized as profit information is given. is improved. In addition, since it is not possible to estimate or recognize the profit state without excessive winning, in order to reduce the number of game balls launched in the unit game of the special game, the number of game balls is increased at the end of the unit game or between unit games (interval) It is possible to suppress the so-called stopping shot, which stops firing.

[Appendix A28]
Said specific condition is that the number of times determined by said transition determining means (41) to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) reaches a predetermined number of times, the game according to appendix A26. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28, profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when the special game state is entered a predetermined number of times during a predetermined period. As a result, by accumulating the profit of shifting to the special game state a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period, the additional profit of obtaining information that can be guessed or recognized as profit information is given. Interest is enhanced.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the specific event occurs when the player suffers a disadvantage.

[Appendix A30]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The disadvantage is the determination result of shifting to the first special game state continuously for a predetermined number of times when the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) yields a determination result of shifting to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix A29, characterized in that is obtained.

[Appendix A31]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The disadvantage is described in appendix A29, characterized in that, in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a determination result indicating that the transition to the special game state is to be made continuously for a predetermined number of times cannot be obtained. game machine.

[Appendix A32]
game state transition means (41) for transitioning a game state when a predetermined state is established among a plurality of game states;
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition is made to determine whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed (jackpot lottery). determination means (41);
further comprising
The game state includes the special game state (jackpot game state), the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified, and the transition determination means (41 ), the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is higher than the first game state, and a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The game state transition means (41)
In the first game state or the second game state, when it is determined by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the special game state,
In the second game state, when it is not determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) before receiving the transition determination of the upper limit number by the transition determination means (41) , to shift the game state to the second game state,
The disadvantage is that the transition determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be performed before receiving the transition determination that is equal to or less than half of the upper limit number in the second game state. A gaming machine according to Appendix A31, characterized in that:

In the gaming machines according to appendices A29 to A32, a display relating to profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when a specific event occurs triggered by the player gaining a disadvantage and a specific condition is satisfied. Content is controlled. Specifically, for example, when the normal jackpots are consecutive, when the misses are not consecutive jackpots, or when the number of remaining STs is large in the ST machine, the display contents regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled. be. That is, as a remedy against the player getting disadvantageous, information that allows the player to guess or recognize the profit information is provided. As a result, it is possible to relieve the disadvantage to the player, and since the game property that profit information can be estimated or recognized as the remedy for the disadvantage is provided, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A33]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A32, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A33, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, whether the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. can enjoy.

[Appendix A34]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game to the start time of the value-adding game. The gaming machine according to appendix A33, characterized in that it is set to .

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A34, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set between the start time of the special game to be shifted to the start time of the value-giving game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first-hit special game and the start time of the value-adding game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so an opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each first win is guaranteed. .

[Appendix A35]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A34, characterized in that

[Appendix A36]
The gaming machine according to appendix A35, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to appendices A35 and A36, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the jackpot game, the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. In this case, profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A37]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A36, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A37, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit where the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of consecutive game hits in which the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the second special game state If the predetermined period does not end between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, A predetermined period ends between the end of the value giving game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive games end and the end of the special game. be done. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the profit state becomes easier to guess or recognize.

[Appendix A38]
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments A1 to A37, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A38, the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of estimating the profit information depending on which information among the plurality of information is to be displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix A39]
The gaming machine according to appendix A38, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A39, each of the plurality of display areas displays specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information, so profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . As a result, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information out of a plurality of pieces of information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A40]
The display control means (51) controls, among the plurality of display areas, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state from the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the player can enjoy the state of profit by estimating the profit state based on the contents displayed on the profit information display means. You can also enjoy whether it is satisfied or not. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A38 to A40, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the profit information display means for displaying the profit information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A42]
The gaming machine according to appendix A41, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A42, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, profit information can be displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to guess or recognize the profit information, and the process of guessing the profit information is simplified without requiring advanced knowledge. to enjoy.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A38 to A40, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43, since the profit information display means can display a profit state image from which profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. This improves the playability of guessing or recognizing the profit state.

[Appendix A44]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Supplementary note A43, wherein the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix A44, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of decorative symbols that informs or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. As a result, the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A45]
the profit state image includes a plurality of image elements;
The display control means (51)
causing the profit information display means (341) to display the plurality of image elements step by step according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period;
The gaming machine according to appendix A43 to appendix A44, wherein the profit state image is displayed on the profit information display means (341) when the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45, a plurality of image elements are displayed step by step on the profit information display means according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. As such, the player can perceive a profitable state if the upper number of certain conditions are met, and if the upper number of certain conditions are not met, the player will be able to gain profit depending on the number of certain conditions that are met. It is possible to enjoy guessing the profit state from the combination of the image elements displayed on the information display means, and also to enjoy whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit number. In this way, since the profit state can be recognized or estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix A46]
The profit information display means (341) has a plurality of individual areas capable of displaying a plurality of profit state candidate images including the profit state image,
The profit information display means (341) displays the profit status candidate image in each of the plurality of individual regions when the specific condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period,
The display control means (51) changes the visibility of the profit state candidate images excluding the profit state image of a number corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. A gaming machine described in A45.

[Appendix A47]
The display control means (51) is characterized by making the profit state candidate images invisible or difficult to see, excluding the profit state images of a number corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A46.

In the gaming machines according to appendices A46 and A47, the visibility of the profit state candidate images excluding the profit state image is changed according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Thus, the player can recognize the profit state by means of the profit state image if the upper number of certain conditions are met, and if the upper number of certain conditions are not met, the number of certain conditions that are met. The user can enjoy guessing the profit state from the profit state candidate image with no change in visibility displayed on the profit information display means according to the condition, and enjoy whether or not the specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit number. can be done. In this way, since the profit state can be recognized or estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix A48]
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, controls the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information. , is executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A48, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times within a predetermined period, control of display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information is performed in a predetermined order. executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the number and the order of which the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine according to appendix A48, wherein the predetermined order is a predefined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A49, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may have a different degree (importance) from which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit status or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, by specifying the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to add a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of guessing the profit information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A50]
The display control means (51) selects from a plurality of order patterns defining the predetermined order according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, according to the order defined by the order pattern. , the gaming machine according to appendix A49, wherein the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A50, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of control target patterns selected from a plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. Here, for the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status by setting a large number of multiple order patterns or setting them to be easily selected because it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine during the game. In addition, by mixing a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state.

[Appendix A51]
The game according to appendix A48, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A51, when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of pieces of information, i.e., randomly selected information out of a plurality of pieces of information, is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit status from being guessed or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. In addition, unlike the game machine according to appendix A50, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary for selecting information whose display is to be controlled from among a plurality of information is simple. become.

[Appendix A52]
The display control means (51) is configured to display the profit information on the profit information display means (39, 341) when the player operates the operation means when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A51, characterized in that the content is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A52, when the player operates the operating means when a specific condition is satisfied, the display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled. Therefore, the player can obtain part or all of the profit information by operating the operation means when a specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the player is actively encouraged to participate in the game in order to display part or all of the profit information on the profit information display means, thereby improving the playability.

[Appendix A53]
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information,
A display area to be controlled by the display control means (51) can be selected from the plurality of display areas by operating the operation means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A52.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A53, the player can select a display area in which one of the plurality of information (part of the profit information) is to be displayed from among the plurality of display areas when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can guess the profit state by selecting the display area at his/her own discretion and obtaining part of the profit information. As a result, different information can be obtained by selecting a different display area each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the profit state can be estimated and enjoyed based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to appendix A53, wherein the specific condition is that the player predicts an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and that the player's prediction comes true.

[Appendix A55]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
production means (341) for executing production in the progress of the game;
further comprising
The special game includes a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player,
The event is a transition determination from when the result of the transition determination in the transition determination means (41) is to shift to a special game until the next result of the transition determination is to shift to a special game. A supplementary note characterized by including at least one of the number of times, the type of special game when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, and the type of effect executed by the effect means. A gaming machine described in A54.

In the gaming machines according to appendices A54 and A55, the player is made to predict events that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and if the player's prediction is correct as a specific condition, the player can change It is possible to enjoy whether or not the prediction is true in a game or a jackpot game. In addition, compared to the case where it is possible to passively guess or recognize profit information such as information on game setting values as the game progresses, the awareness of participation in the game improves and the process of guessing or recognizing profit information is improved. You can enjoy it even more.

[Appendix A56]
When the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied during the predetermined period is selected from the plurality of display areas by operating the operation means. The game machine according to appendix A55, characterized in that it can be selected as a control target by means (51).

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to appendix A55 or appendix A56, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A56 and A57, it is possible to select, from a plurality of display areas, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within a predetermined period by operating the operating means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times during a predetermined period, two or more pieces of information can be obtained by selecting the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times. As a result, it is possible to obtain two or more pieces of information in one predetermined period of time, so that it is possible to enjoy estimating the state of profit based on a combination of different pieces of information.

[Appendix A58]
The profit information is performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) as an indicator of ball payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to Appendix A57.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A58, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an indicator of the ball putting performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball putting performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball payout performance, enjoy the game in the expectation that the ball payout performance will be recognizable, and continue the game based on the guessed ball payout performance or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix A59]
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the transition decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. further prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix A58, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A59, since the profit information includes information regarding the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the ball output performance of the gaming machine, it is possible to estimate or recognize the probability of advantageous determination, thereby improving the ball output performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the performance of putting out balls based on an index that more appropriately reflects the As a result, the player enjoys guessing the probability of advantageous decision, enjoys the game in the expectation that the probability of advantageous decision will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the result of guessing or recognizing the probability of advantageous decision. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix A60]
The gaming machine according to appendix A58 or appendix A59, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A60, the performance information, which is advantageous information, includes information indicating the ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winports. It is possible to infer or recognize performance information that indicates Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance of the winning openings among the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the gaming machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting to be able to recognize the ball payout performance based on the winning opening, and guesses the ball payout performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, based on the recognition result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game.

[Appendix A61]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when a game ball enters,
The performance information is sent to the first winning port (314) until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls, or until the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix A60, further comprising information on the number of unit determinations in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball in (41).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A61, the information on the number of unit judgments is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the number of unit judgments can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations, the player can guess or recognize the susceptibility to transition determination in the normal game state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game in anticipation of being able to recognize the number of unit judgments, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the number of unit judgments. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix A62]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
The performance information includes the number of game balls discharged to the game board (31), the number of game balls to enter the first winning port (314), and the general winning port (313). A gaming machine according to appendix A60, characterized in that it includes information on a ball payout ratio (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the game ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A62, the performance information includes information on the pay-out rate as the performance information that is advantageous information, so the information on the pay-out rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the likelihood of winning the first winning slot and the general winning slots. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout rate, enjoys the game in the expectation that the ball payout rate will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the guessed ball payout rate or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix A63]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). A gaming machine according to appendix A60, characterized by including information on a continuous role ratio, which is a ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of incoming balls.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A63, the performance information includes information on the continuous role ratio as the performance information that is the advantageous information, so the information on the continuous role ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes, and the number of payouts of game balls entering the variable winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the continuous role ratio, the player can determine the frequency of the transition determination result to shift to the special game (residence ratio in the special game state) and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by estimating the continuous role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the continuous role ratio will be recognizable, and play the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix A64]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game with the support of an electric role object. A second prize winning port (315) into which a ball can be entered and which gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the game ball in the special game state. a variable winning port (316);
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). It is characterized by including information on the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls for the entering ball and the number of paid out balls for the entering of the game ball to the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix A60.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A64, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information about the character ratio, so it is possible to guess or recognize the information about the character ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information on the role ratio, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the support of the electric role It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the staying ratio of the receiving support game state (time-saving game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the role ratio will become recognizable, and continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix A65]
64. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to 64, wherein the performance information is information relating to an expected ball output value.

[Appendix A66]
The expected ball output value is the expected number of output balls (number of payout game balls) with respect to the total number of game balls fired (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are fired. The gaming machine according to Appendix A65, characterized in that it is a percentage.

In the gaming machines according to appendices A65 and A66, the information on the expected ball payout value is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the expected ball payout value can be estimated or recognized. Here, the expected ball output value is, for example, the expected number of output balls (discharge game balls number). The expected value of paid out balls is 100% when the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) and the expected number of paid out balls (number of paid out game balls) are the same. number of balls) is more than 100%, and it is less than 100% when the expected number of paid-out balls (number of game balls to be paid out) is less. In other words, when the expected ball output value exceeds 100%, it is advantageous to the player, and the higher the value is, the higher the ball output performance is. On the other hand, when the expected ball output value is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the value is, the lower the ball output performance is. In this way, the expected ball output value is highly correlated with the ball output performance of a gaming machine, so variations in ball output performance among gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during the manufacturing process of the gaming machine and changes over time are more likely to occur. It becomes possible for the player to guess or recognize the appropriately reflected ball payout performance. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the expected ball payout value, enjoy the game while expecting that the expected ball payout value will be recognizable, and play the game based on the guessed or recognized expected ball payout value. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix A67]
Transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big win game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (big win lottery);
A first prize winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball;
A game ball enters the first winning port (314) until the difference ball number reaches a predetermined number of balls minus or until the number of game balls shot into the game board (31) reaches a specific ball number. a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments in which the transition judgment is performed by the transition judgment means (41) triggered by the ball;
a borderline calculation means (51) for calculating a borderline, which is the number of transition judgments required for the ball lending per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected ball output value to 100%;
further comprising
The expected ball output value is a borderline sufficiency rate which is a ratio of the number of unit judgments calculated by the number of judgments calculation means (41) to the borderline calculated by the borderline calculation means (51). The gaming machine according to appendix A65, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A67, the information on the borderline filling rate, which is an example of the expected ball output value, is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the borderline filling rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the border line is the number of transition judgments required for the ball rental unit per unit amount in order to make the expected ball output value 100%. calculated on the assumption that In addition, the borderline sufficiency rate is the ratio of the number of unit judgments to the borderline. disadvantageous to those who Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the borderline sufficiency rate, the player enjoys guessing the borderline sufficiency rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the borderline filling rate.

[Appendix B1]
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the specific condition can be established when a game ball passes through the specific area.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the specific condition can be established when the specific area is passed, so the player can easily grasp that the specific condition has been met. This allows for more fun as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, the display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2]
Further comprising a discharge port (318, 373) for discharging the game ball flowing down to the game area to the back side of the game board,
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the specific area is the outlet (318, 373).

[Appendix B3]
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
The discharge ports (318, 373) include a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board; a second outlet (373) different from the outlet (318);
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B4]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4, the display content of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of game balls that have entered the second discharge port into which the game balls can enter in the special game. . Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed in an inorganic manner, it is possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix B5]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix B4, wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316) to enter.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B5, the profit information is displayed according to the number of game balls that have passed through the variable winning opening into which the game balls can enter in the special game and have entered the second discharge opening into which the game balls can enter. The content of the profit information displayed on the means is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be entered into the second discharge hole by hitting the game ball into the game area and making the game ball enter the variable winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to guess or recognize the profit state simply by proceeding with the special game as usual, without requiring any special skill. As a result, compared to the case where a difference in skill may occur due to the game ball entering the second discharge port, it is possible to avoid playing games on the gaming machine for the reason that a difference in skill may occur. prevented.

[Appendix B6]
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the specific area is at least one of the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316).

[Appendix B7]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The gaming machine according to appendix B6, wherein the specific area is the variable winning opening (316).

In the gaming machines according to appendices B6 and B7, the display contents of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled when a game ball enters a prize winning hole such as a variable winning hole from which prize balls are paid out. As a result, when the player obtains the profit of the prize ball, the player is provided with a game feature in which the profit can be obtained by estimating or recognizing the profit information. Therefore, compared to gaming machines in which winning balls are simply obtained by entering a game ball into a winning opening, the importance of entering a game ball into a winning opening is increased. It is possible to make the player pay attention and have an interest in the entry of the game ball into the winning hole, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix B8]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The variable winning port (316) is opened by the start of the unit game to allow entry of game balls, and is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed or when an upper limit number of game balls have entered,
The gaming machine according to appendix B7, wherein the specific condition is that game balls exceeding an upper limit number are entered into the variable winning hole (316).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix B8, profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when there is excessive winning (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit of the variable winning opening in the unit game of the special game. In other words, profit status cannot be estimated or recognized without over-winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress the so-called stopping shot, in which the shooting of game balls is stopped at the end of the unit game or between unit games (intervals) for the purpose of reducing the number of shot game balls in the unit game of the special game.

[Appendix B9]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a starting port (314, 315) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the passage of a game ball;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the specific area is the starting port (314, 315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9, the display content of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball enters the starting hole that satisfies the determination condition for determining the transition to the special game state. be done. As a result, when the player obtains the profit that the determination condition is satisfied, the player can obtain the profit that the profit information can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which a profit can be obtained simply by satisfying the judgment condition simply by entering a game ball into the start hole, the importance of entering a game ball into the start hole is increased. By making the player pay attention to the entry of the game ball into the starting hole, the interest in the entry of the game ball into the start hole can be aroused, and the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix B10]
Further comprising retention means (38) for retaining the game ball that has passed through the specific area (373) during the predetermined period and releasing the game ball after the predetermined period has elapsed,
The display control means (51) controls the profit information to be displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) after the predetermined period of time according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period of time. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B9, characterized in that display content is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B10, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the profit state by the display contents of the profit information display means after the predetermined period has passed. As a result, the player can enjoy the game in anticipation of what content will be displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix B11]
The staying means (38) is a movable member (383) movable between a first position (upper limit position) that restricts the movement of the game ball and a second position (lower limit position) that allows the movement of the game ball. with
The gaming machine according to appendix B10, wherein the movable member (383) is at the first position at least at the beginning of the predetermined period and is at the second position at the end of the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B11, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball is retained in the retaining means and a state in which the game ball is not retained by the simple configuration and control of moving the movable member.

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine according to appendix B10 or appendix B11, wherein the game ball held in the holding means (38) is visible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B12, since the game balls retained in the retaining means are visually recognizable, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls retained in the retaining means (number of specific conditions satisfied). . Therefore, the player can know in advance that the profit state is recognizably displayed on the profit information display means, for example, when he or she confirms that the number of game balls equal to or greater than the upper limit is retained in the retention means. Further, even if the number of game balls below the upper limit is retained in the retention means, the profit state can be estimated based on the content displayed on the profit information display means in consideration of the number of visually recognized game balls. . As a result, the probability of estimating the profit state increases and the enjoyment of estimating the profit state also increases, so that the playability is further improved.

[Appendix B13]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix B11 or appendix B12, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B13, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, whether the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. can enjoy.

[Appendix B14]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game to the start time of the value-adding game. The gaming machine according to appendix B13, characterized in that it is set to .

In the gaming machine according to appendix B14, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set between the start time of the special game to be shifted to the start time of the value-giving game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first-hit special game and the start time of the value-adding game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so an opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each first win is guaranteed. .

[Appendix B15]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B14, characterized in that

[Appendix B16]
The gaming machine according to appendix B15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to appendices B15 and B16, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the jackpot game, the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. In this case, profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix B17]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix B16, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B17, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit where the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of consecutive game hits in which the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the second special game state If the predetermined period does not end between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive games end and the end of the special game. be done. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the profit state becomes easier to guess or recognize.

[Appendix B18]
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments B1 to B17, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B18, the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of estimating the profit information depending on which information among the plurality of information is to be displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix B19]
The gaming machine according to appendix B18, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B19, each of the plurality of display areas displays specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information, so profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . As a result, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information out of a plurality of pieces of information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix B20]
The display control means (51) controls, among the plurality of display areas, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B20, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state from the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the player can enjoy the state of profit by estimating the profit state based on the contents displayed on the profit information display means. You can also enjoy whether it is satisfied or not. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix B21]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B18 to B20, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B21, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the profit information display means for displaying the profit information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix B22]
The gaming machine according to appendix B21, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B22, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, profit information can be displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to guess or recognize the profit information, and the process of guessing the profit information is simplified without requiring advanced knowledge. to enjoy.

[Appendix B23]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B17 to B20, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that indicates or indicates the profit state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B23, since a profit state image from which profit information can be recognized can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. This improves the playability of guessing or recognizing the profit state.

[Appendix B24]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Supplementary note B23, wherein the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix B24, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the ornamental pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. As a result, the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix B25]
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, controls the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information. , is executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B25, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times in a predetermined period, control of display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information is performed in a predetermined order. executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the number and the order of which the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

[Appendix B26]
The gaming machine according to appendix B25, wherein the predetermined order is a predefined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B26, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may have a different degree (importance) from which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit status or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, by specifying the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to add a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of guessing the profit information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix B27]
The display control means (51) selects from a plurality of order patterns defining the predetermined order according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, according to the order defined by the order pattern. , the gaming machine according to appendix B26, wherein the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B27, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of control target patterns selected from a plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. Here, for the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status by setting a large number of multiple order patterns or setting them to be easily selected because it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine during the game. In addition, by mixing a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state.

[Appendix B28]
The game according to appendix B26, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B28, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from a plurality of information is controlled when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit status from being guessed or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. In addition, unlike the game machine according to appendix B28, it is not necessary to set the order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is to be controlled from among the plurality of information is simple. become.

[Appendix B29]
The profit information is performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) as an indicator of ball payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B28.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B29, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the ball paying performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball paying performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball payout performance, enjoy the game in the expectation that the ball payout performance will be recognizable, and continue the game based on the guessed ball payout performance or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix B30]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the transition decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. further prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix B29, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix B30, since the profit information includes information regarding the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the ball output performance of the gaming machine, the possibility of estimating or recognizing the probability of advantageous determination will improve the ball output performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the performance of putting out balls based on an index that more appropriately reflects the As a result, the player enjoys guessing the probability of advantageous decision, enjoys the game in the expectation that the probability of advantageous decision will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the result of guessing or recognizing the probability of advantageous decision. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix B31]
The gaming machine according to appendix B29 or appendix B30, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B31, the performance information, which is advantageous information, includes information indicating the ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winports. It is possible to infer or recognize performance information that indicates Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance of the winning openings among the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the gaming machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting to be able to recognize the ball payout performance based on the winning opening, and guesses the ball payout performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, based on the recognition result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game.

[Appendix B32]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when a game ball enters,
The performance information is sent to the first winning port (314) until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls, or until the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix B31, further comprising information on the number of unit determinations in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball in (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B32, since the information regarding the number of unit determinations is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the information regarding the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations, the player can guess or recognize the susceptibility to transition determination in the normal game state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game in anticipation of being able to recognize the number of unit judgments, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the number of unit judgments. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix B33]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
The performance information includes the number of game balls discharged to the game board (31), the number of game balls to enter the first winning port (314), and the general winning port (313). The gaming machine according to appendix B31, characterized by including information on a ball payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the game ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B33, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information on the pay-out rate, so the information on the pay-out rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the ball payout ratio is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning hole and the general winning hole to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the likelihood of winning the first winning slot and the general winning slots. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout rate, enjoys the game in the expectation that the ball payout rate will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the guessed ball payout rate or recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix B34]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix B31, characterized by including information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of incoming balls.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B34, the performance information includes information on the continuous role ratio as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the continuous role ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes, and the number of payouts of game balls entering the variable winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the continuous role ratio, the player can determine the frequency of the transition determination result to shift to the special game (residence ratio in the special game state) and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by estimating the continuous role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the continuous role ratio will be recognizable, and play the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix B35]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game with the support of an electric role object. A second prize winning port (315) into which a ball can be entered and which gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the game ball in the special game state. a variable winning port (316);
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). It is characterized by including information on the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls for the entering ball and the number of paid out balls for the entering of the game ball to the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix B31.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B35, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information about the character ratio, so that the information about the character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information on the role ratio, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the support of the electric role It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the staying ratio of the receiving support game state (time-saving game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the role ratio will become recognizable, and continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix C1]
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the specific condition is established when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1, the display contents of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled when a specific condition that is established by the occurrence of a specific event during a game is satisfied for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not a specific event occurs during the progress of the game. You can enjoy guessing the profit state depending on the content. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated with the occurrence of a specific event during the progress of the game, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game. .

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the specific event occurs when the player obtains a profit.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, the display content of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when a specific event occurs when the player obtains a profit and a specific condition is satisfied. be. As a result, the player is provided with a game feature in which an additional profit is given such that profit information can be guessed or recognizable information is obtained when the player obtains a profit, and thus the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the specific event is triggered by the player obtaining a profit, and occurs when a new profit is obtained by obtaining the profit.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C3, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when a new profit is obtained when a player obtains a profit and a specific event occurs and a specific condition is satisfied. The display content regarding profit information is controlled. As a result, when a new profit is obtained as a result of obtaining a profit, an additional profit is given by obtaining information that can be used to guess or recognize the profit information. be improved.

[Appendix C4]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix C2 or appendix C3, wherein the specific event is transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, when the player obtains the profit of being shifted to the special game state, the display contents of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled. As a result, when the game is shifted to the special game state, the player is provided with the additional benefit of obtaining information that can be used to guess or recognize the benefit information, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Appendix C5]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The variable winning port (316) is opened by the start of the unit game to allow entry of game balls, and is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed or when an upper limit number of game balls have entered,
The gaming machine according to appendix C4, wherein the specific condition is that game balls exceeding the upper limit number enter the variable winning hole (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5, when a profit of excessive winning (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit of the variable winning opening is obtained in the unit game of the special game, the profit information display means displays the profit information. As a result, when the profit of excessive winning in the unit game of the special game is obtained, the additional profit of obtaining information that can be guessed or recognized as profit information is given. is improved. In addition, since it is not possible to estimate or recognize the profit state without excessive winning, in order to reduce the number of game balls launched in the unit game of the special game, the number of game balls is increased at the end of the unit game or between unit games (interval) It is possible to suppress the so-called stopping shot, which stops firing.

[Appendix C6]
The game according to appendix C4, wherein the specific condition is that the number of times the shift determining means (41) determines to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) reaches a predetermined number of times. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C6, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when the state is shifted to the special game state a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period. As a result, by accumulating the profit of shifting to the special game state a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period, the additional profit of obtaining information that can be guessed or recognized as profit information is given. Interest is enhanced.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the specific event occurs when the player suffers a disadvantage.

[Appendix C8]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The disadvantage is the determination result of shifting to the first special game state continuously for a predetermined number of times when the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) yields a determination result of shifting to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix C7, characterized in that is obtained.

[Appendix C9]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The disadvantage is described in appendix C7, wherein in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a determination result indicating that the transition to the special game state is to be made continuously for a predetermined number of times cannot be obtained. game machine.

[Appendix C10]
game state transition means (41) for transitioning a game state when a predetermined state is established among a plurality of game states;
Based on the establishment of a determination condition, a transition is made to determine whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed (jackpot lottery). determination means (41);
further comprising
The game state includes the special game state (jackpot game state), the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified, and the transition determination means (41 ), the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is higher than the first game state, and a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The game state transition means (41)
In the first game state or the second game state, when it is determined by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the special game state,
In the second game state, when it is not determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) before receiving the transition determination of the upper limit number by the transition determination means (41) , to shift the game state to the second game state,
The disadvantage is that the transition determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be performed before receiving the transition determination that is equal to or less than half of the upper limit number in the second game state. A gaming machine according to Appendix C7, characterized in that:

In the gaming machines according to appendices C7 to C10, a display related to profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a specific event triggered by the player gaining a disadvantage. Content is controlled. Specifically, for example, when the normal jackpots are consecutive, when the misses are not consecutive jackpots, or when the number of remaining STs is large in the ST machine, the display contents regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled. be. That is, as a remedy against the player getting disadvantageous, information that allows the player to guess or recognize the profit information is provided. As a result, it is possible to relieve the disadvantage to the player, and since the game property that profit information can be estimated or recognized as the remedy for the disadvantage is provided, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C10, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C11, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, whether the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. can enjoy.

[Appendix C12]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game to the start time of the value-adding game. The gaming machine according to appendix C11, characterized in that it is set to .

In the gaming machine according to appendix C12, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set between the start time of the special game to be shifted to the start time of the value-giving game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first-hit special game and the start time of the value-adding game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so an opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each first win is guaranteed. .

[Appendix C13]
The end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C12, characterized in that

[Appendix C14]
The gaming machine according to appendix C13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to appendices C13 and C14, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the jackpot game, the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. In this case, profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix C15]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix C14, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C15, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit where the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of consecutive game hits in which the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the second special game state If the predetermined period does not end between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, A predetermined period ends between the end of the value giving game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive games end and the end of the special game. be done. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the profit state becomes easier to guess or recognize.

[Appendix C15]
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C14, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C15, the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of estimating the profit information depending on which information among the plurality of information is to be displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix C16]
The gaming machine according to appendix C15, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C16, each of the plurality of display areas displays specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information, so profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . As a result, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information out of a plurality of pieces of information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix C17]
The display control means (51) controls display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times the special condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix C15 or appendix C16, characterized by:

[Appendix C18]
The display control means (51) controls, among the plurality of display areas, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machines according to appendices C17 and C18, the display contents of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state from the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the player can enjoy the state of profit by estimating the profit state based on the contents displayed on the profit information display means. You can also enjoy whether it is satisfied or not. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix C19]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C13 to C18, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C19, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the profit information display means for displaying the profit information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix C20]
The gaming machine according to appendix C19, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C20, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, profit information can be displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to guess or recognize the profit information, and the process of guessing the profit information is simplified without requiring advanced knowledge. to enjoy.

[Appendix C21]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C14 to C18, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that indicates or indicates the profit state.

Since the gaming machine according to appendix C21 can display a profit state image from which profit information can be recognized on the profit information display means, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. This improves the playability of guessing or recognizing the profit state.

[Appendix C22]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Supplementary note C21, wherein the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix C22, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of decorative symbols that informs or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. As a result, the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix C23]
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, controls the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information. , is executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C23, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times within a predetermined period, display control of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information is performed in a predetermined order. executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the number and the order of which the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

[Appendix C24]
The gaming machine according to appendix C23, wherein the predetermined order is a predefined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C24, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may have a different degree (importance) from which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit status or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, by specifying the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to add a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of guessing the profit information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix C25]
The display control means (51) selects from a plurality of order patterns defining the predetermined order according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, according to the order defined by the order pattern. , the gaming machine according to appendix C24, wherein the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C25, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of control target patterns selected from a plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Here, for the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status by setting a large number of multiple order patterns or setting them to be easily selected because it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine during the game. In addition, by mixing a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state.

[Appendix C26]
The game according to appendix C23, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C26, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of pieces of information, i.e., randomly selected information out of a plurality of pieces of information, is controlled when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit status from being guessed or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. In addition, unlike the game machine according to appendix C25, it is not necessary to set the order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is to be controlled from among the plurality of information is simple. become.

[Appendix C27]
The profit information is performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) as an indicator of ball payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C26.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C27, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the ball payout performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball payout performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball payout performance, enjoy the game while expecting that the ball payout performance will be recognizable, and continue the game based on the guessed ball payout performance or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix C28]
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the transition decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. further prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix C27, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C28, since the profit information includes information regarding the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the ball-dispensing performance of the gaming machine, the possibility of estimating or recognizing the probability of advantageous determination will improve the ball-dispensing performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the performance of putting out balls based on an index that more appropriately reflects the As a result, the player enjoys guessing the probability of advantageous decision, enjoys the game in the expectation that the probability of advantageous decision will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the result of guessing or recognizing the probability of advantageous decision. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix C29]
The gaming machine according to appendix C27 or appendix C28, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winning openings (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C29, the performance information, which is the advantageous information, includes information indicating the ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winports. It is possible to infer or recognize performance information that indicates Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects variations in the winning performance of the winning openings among gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the gaming machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys estimating the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting to be able to recognize the ball payout performance based on the winning opening, and guesses the ball payout performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, based on the recognition result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game.

[Appendix C30]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when a game ball enters,
The performance information is sent to the first winning port (314) until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls, or until the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix C29, further comprising information regarding the number of unit determinations in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball in (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C30, since the information regarding the number of unit determinations is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the information regarding the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations, the player can guess or recognize the susceptibility to transition determination in the normal game state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game in anticipation of being able to recognize the number of unit judgments, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the number of unit judgments. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix C31]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
The performance information includes the number of game balls discharged to the game board (31), the number of game balls to enter the first winning port (314), and the general winning port (313). A gaming machine according to appendix C29, characterized by including information on a ball payout ratio (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the game ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C31, the performance information includes information on the pay-out rate as the performance information that is the advantageous information, so the information on the pay-out rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the ball payout ratio is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning hole and the general winning hole to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the likelihood of winning the first winning slot and the general winning slots. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout rate, enjoys the game in the expectation that the ball payout rate will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the guessed ball payout rate or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix C32]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). A gaming machine according to appendix C29, characterized by including information on a continuous role ratio, which is a ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of incoming balls.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C32, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information regarding the consecutive character ratio, so that information regarding the consecutive character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes, and the number of payouts of game balls entering the variable winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the continuous role ratio, the player can determine the frequency of the transition determination result to shift to the special game (residence ratio in the special game state) and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by estimating the continuous role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the continuous role ratio will be recognizable, and play the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix C33]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game with the support of an electric role object. A second prize winning port (315) into which a ball can be entered and which gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the game ball in the special game state. a variable winning port (316);
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). It is characterized by including information on the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls for the entering ball and the number of paid out balls for the entering of the game ball to the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix C29.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C33, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information about the character ratio, so it is possible to guess or recognize the information about the character ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information on the role ratio, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the support of the electric role It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the staying ratio of the receiving support game state (time-saving game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the role ratio will become recognizable, and continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix D1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period;
with
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, whether the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. can enjoy

[Appendix D2]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot) and after the end of the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the notified second game state (high probability mode),
The start time of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game to the start time of the value-adding game. The gaming machine according to appendix D1, characterized in that it is set to .

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set between the start time of the special game to be shifted to the start time of the value-giving game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first-hit special game and the start time of the value-adding game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so an opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each first win is guaranteed. .

[Appendix D3]
The end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to appendix D1 or appendix D2, characterized in that

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game.

By the way, between the end of the value giving game and the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to appendices D3 and D4, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the jackpot game, the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. In this case, profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix D5]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot) and after the end of the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the notified second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine according to appendix D4, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit where the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of consecutive game hits in which the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the second special game state If the predetermined period does not end from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state. , the predetermined period ends from the end of the value-adding game in the first special game state to the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive games end and the end of the special game. be done. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the profit state becomes easier to guess or recognize.

[Appendix D6]
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments D1 to D5, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6, the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of estimating the profit information depending on which information among the plurality of information is to be displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix D7]
The gaming machine according to appendix D6, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D7, specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information items is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, so profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . As a result, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information out of a plurality of pieces of information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix D8]
The display control means (51) controls, among the plurality of display areas, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D8, display contents related to profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the state of profit based on the content displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit is satisfied within a predetermined period of time, and the player can enjoy the game by guessing the profit state based on the content displayed on the profit information display means. You can also enjoy whether it is satisfied or not. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix D9]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments D6 to D8, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D9, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the profit information display means for displaying the profit information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix D10]
The gaming machine according to appendix D9, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D10, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to guess or recognize the profit information, and the process of guessing the profit information is simplified without requiring advanced knowledge. to enjoy.

[Appendix D11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D6 to D8, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

Since the gaming machine according to appendix D11 can display a profit state image from which profit information can be recognized on the profit information display means, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. This improves the playability of guessing or recognizing the profit state.

[Appendix D12]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Supplement D11, wherein the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix D12, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the ornamental pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. As a result, the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix D13]
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, controls the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information. , is executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D13, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times in a predetermined period, control of display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information is performed in a predetermined order. executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the number and the order of which the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

[Appendix D14]
The gaming machine according to appendix D13, wherein the predetermined order is a predefined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D14, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may have a different degree (importance) from which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit status or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, by specifying the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to add a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of guessing the profit information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D15]
The display control means (51) selects from a plurality of order patterns defining the predetermined order according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, according to the order defined by the order pattern. , the gaming machine according to appendix D14, wherein the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D15, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of control target patterns selected from a plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Here, for the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status by setting a large number of multiple order patterns or setting them to be easily selected because it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine during the game. In addition, by mixing a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state.

[Appendix D16]
The game according to appendix D13, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D16, when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, i.e., randomly selected information out of the plurality of information, is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit status from being guessed or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. In addition, unlike the game machine according to appendix D15, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary for selecting information whose display is to be controlled from among a plurality of information is simple. become.

[Appendix D17]
The profit information is performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) as an indicator of ball payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D16.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D17, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the ball putting performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball putting performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball payout performance, enjoy the game in the expectation that the ball payout performance will be recognizable, and continue the game based on the guessed ball payout performance or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix D18]
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the transition decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. further prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix D17, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D18, since the profit information includes information regarding the probability of advantageous judgment that greatly affects the ball-dispensing performance of the gaming machine, it is possible to estimate or recognize the probability of advantageous judgment, thereby improving the ball-dispensing performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the performance of putting out balls based on an index that more appropriately reflects the As a result, the player enjoys guessing the probability of advantageous decision, enjoys the game in the expectation that the probability of advantageous decision will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the result of guessing or recognizing the probability of advantageous decision. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix D19]
The gaming machine according to appendix D13 or appendix D14, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize-winning holes (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D19, the performance information, which is the advantageous information, includes information indicating the ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winports. It is possible to infer or recognize performance information that indicates Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance of the winning openings among the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the gaming machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting to be able to recognize the ball payout performance based on the winning opening, and guesses the ball payout performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, based on the recognition result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game.

[Appendix D20]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when a game ball enters,
The performance information is sent to the first winning port (314) until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls, or until the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix D19, characterized by including information on the number of unit determinations in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball in (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D20, the information on the number of unit judgments is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the number of unit judgments can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations, the player can guess or recognize the susceptibility to transition determination in the normal game state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game in anticipation of being able to recognize the number of unit judgments, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the number of unit judgments. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix D21]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
The performance information includes the number of game balls discharged to the game board (31), the number of game balls to enter the first winning port (314), and the general winning port (313). A gaming machine according to appendix D19, characterized in that it includes information on a ball payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the game ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D21, the performance information includes information on the pay-out rate as the performance information, which is advantageous information, so the information on the pay-out rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the likelihood of winning the first winning slot and the general winning slots. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout rate, enjoys the game in the expectation that the ball payout rate will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the guessed ball payout rate or recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix D22]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix D19, characterized by including information on a continuous role ratio, which is a ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of incoming balls.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D22, the performance information includes information on the continuous role ratio as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the continuous role ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes, and the number of payouts of game balls entering the variable winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the continuous role ratio, the player can determine the frequency of the transition determination result to shift to the special game (residence ratio in the special game state) and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by estimating the continuous role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the continuous role ratio will be recognizable, and play the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix D23]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game with the support of an electric role object. A second prize winning port (315) into which a ball can be entered and which gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the game ball in the special game state. a variable winning port (316);
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). It is characterized by including information on the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls for the entering ball and the number of paid out balls for the entering of the game ball to the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D19.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D23, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information regarding the character ratio, so that the information regarding the character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information on the role ratio, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the support of the electric role It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the staying ratio of the receiving support game state (time-saving game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the role ratio will become recognizable, and continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix E1]
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period;
with
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
A gaming machine, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of estimating the profit information depending on which information among the plurality of information is to be displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, each of the plurality of display areas displays specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information, so profit information can be estimated based on the corresponding relationship. . As a result, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information out of a plurality of pieces of information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix E3]
The display control means (51) controls, among the plurality of display areas, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E3, the display contents of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state from the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the player can enjoy the state of profit by estimating the profit state based on the contents displayed on the profit information display means. You can also enjoy whether it is satisfied or not. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the profit information display means for displaying the profit information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to appendix E4, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, profit information can be displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to guess or recognize the profit information, and the process of guessing the profit information is simplified without requiring advanced knowledge. to enjoy.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6, since a profit state image from which profit information can be recognized can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. This improves the playability of guessing or recognizing the profit state.

[Appendix E7]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Appendix E6, wherein the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the ornamental pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. As a result, the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8]
the profit state image includes a plurality of image elements;
The display control means (51)
causing the profit information display means (341) to display the plurality of image elements step by step according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period;
The gaming machine according to appendix E6 or appendix E7, wherein the profit state image is displayed on the profit information display means (341) when the specific condition for the upper limit number is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8, a plurality of image elements are displayed step by step on the profit information display means according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. As such, the player can perceive a profitable state if the upper number of certain conditions are met, and if the upper number of certain conditions are not met, the player will be able to gain profit depending on the number of certain conditions that are met. It is possible to enjoy guessing the profit state from the combination of the image elements displayed on the information display means, and also to enjoy whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit number. In this way, since the profit state can be recognized or estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix E9]
The profit information display means (341) has a plurality of individual areas capable of displaying a plurality of profit state candidate images including the profit state image,
The profit information display means (341) displays the profit status candidate image in each of the plurality of individual regions when the specific condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period,
The display control means (51) changes the visibility of the profit state candidate images excluding the profit state image of a number corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in E8.

[Appendix E10]
The display control means (51) is characterized by making the profit state candidate images invisible or difficult to see, excluding the profit state images of a number corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. A gaming machine as described in Appendix E9.

In the gaming machines according to appendices E9 and E10, the visibility of the profit state candidate images excluding the profit state image is changed according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Thus, the player can recognize the profit state by means of the profit state image if the upper number of certain conditions are met, and if the upper number of certain conditions are not met, the number of certain conditions that are met. The user can enjoy guessing the profit state from the profit state candidate image with no change in visibility displayed on the profit information display means according to the condition, and enjoy whether or not the specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit number. can be done. In this way, since the profit state can be recognized or estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix E11]
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, controls the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information. , is executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E11, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times within a predetermined period of time, display control of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information is performed in a predetermined order. executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the number and the order of which the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

[Appendix E12]
The gaming machine according to appendix E11, wherein the predetermined order is a predefined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E12, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may have a different degree (importance) from which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit status or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, by specifying the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to add a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of guessing the profit information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E13]
The display control means (51) selects from a plurality of order patterns defining the predetermined order according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, according to the order defined by the order pattern. , the gaming machine according to appendix E12, wherein the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E13, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of control target patterns selected from a plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Here, for the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status by setting a large number of multiple order patterns or setting them to be easily selected because it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine during the game. In addition, by mixing a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state.

[Appendix E14]
The game according to appendix E11, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E14, when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of pieces of information, that is, randomly selected information out of a plurality of pieces of information, is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit status from being guessed or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. In addition, unlike the game machine according to appendix E13, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select information whose display is to be controlled from among a plurality of information is simple. become.

[Appendix E15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E14, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E15, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game. can enjoy.

[Appendix E16]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game to the start time of the value-adding game. The gaming machine according to appendix E15, characterized in that it is set to .

In the gaming machine according to appendix E16, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set between the start time of the special game to be shifted to the start time of the value-giving game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first-hit special game and the start time of the value-adding game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so an opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each first win is guaranteed. .

[Appendix E17]
The end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E16, characterized in that

[Appendix E18]
The gaming machine according to appendix E17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to notes E17 and E18, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the jackpot game. In this case, profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix E19]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E19, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit where the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of consecutive game hits in which the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the second special game state If the predetermined period does not end between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, A predetermined period ends between the end of the value giving game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive games end and the end of the special game. be done. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the profit state becomes easier to guess or recognize.

[Appendix E20]
The profit information is performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) as an indicator of ball payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to Appendix E19.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E20, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the ball putting performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball putting performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball payout performance, enjoy the game in the expectation that the ball payout performance will be recognizable, and continue the game based on the guessed ball payout performance or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix E21]
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the transition decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. further prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix E20, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E21, since the profit information includes information regarding the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the ball output performance of the gaming machine, the possibility of estimating or recognizing the probability of advantageous determination will improve the ball output performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the performance of putting out balls based on an index that more appropriately reflects the As a result, the player enjoys guessing the probability of advantageous decision, enjoys the game in the expectation that the probability of advantageous decision will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the result of guessing or recognizing the probability of advantageous decision. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix E22]
The gaming machine according to appendix E20 or appendix E21, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E22, the performance information, which is advantageous information, includes information indicating the ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winports. It is possible to infer or recognize performance information that indicates Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects variations in the winning performance of the winning openings among gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the gaming machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys estimating the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting to be able to recognize the ball payout performance based on the winning opening, and guesses the ball payout performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, based on the recognition result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game.

[Appendix E23]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when a game ball enters,
The performance information is sent to the first winning port (314) until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls, or until the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix E22, characterized in that it includes information on the number of unit determinations in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball in (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E23, the information on the number of unit judgments is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the number of unit judgments can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations, the player can guess or recognize the susceptibility to transition determination in the normal game state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game in anticipation of being able to recognize the number of unit judgments, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the number of unit judgments. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix E24]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
The performance information includes the number of game balls discharged to the game board (31), the number of game balls to enter the first winning port (314), and the general winning port (313). The gaming machine according to appendix E22, characterized in that it includes information on a ball payout ratio (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the game ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E24, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information on the pay-out rate, so the information on the pay-out rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the likelihood of winning the first winning slot and the general winning slots. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout rate, enjoys the game in the expectation that the ball payout rate will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the guessed ball payout rate or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix E25]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix E22, characterized by including information on a continuous role ratio, which is a ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of incoming balls.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E25, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information regarding the consecutive character ratio, so that the information regarding the consecutive character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes, and the number of payouts of game balls entering the variable winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the continuous role ratio, the player can determine the frequency of the transition determination result to shift to the special game (residence ratio in the special game state) and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by estimating the continuous role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the continuous role ratio will be recognizable, and play the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix E26]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game with the support of an electric role object. A second prize winning port (315) into which a ball can be entered and which gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the game ball in the special game state. a variable winning port (316);
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). It is characterized by including information on the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls for the entering ball and the number of paid out balls for the entering of the game ball to the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E22.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E26, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information about the character ratio, so it is possible to guess or recognize the information about the character ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information on the role ratio, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the support of the electric role It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the staying ratio of the receiving support game state (time-saving game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the role ratio will become recognizable, and continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix F1]
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
with
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, controls the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information. , in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times within a predetermined period, the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information is controlled in a predetermined order. executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the number and the order of which the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the predetermined order is a predefined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may have a different degree (importance) from which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit status or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, by specifying the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to add a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of guessing the profit information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix F3]
The display control means (51) selects from a plurality of order patterns defining the predetermined order according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, according to the order defined by the order pattern. , the gaming machine according to appendix F2, wherein the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F3, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of control target patterns selected from a plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. Here, for the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status by setting a large number of multiple order patterns or setting them to be easily selected because it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine during the game. In addition, by mixing a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state.

[Appendix F4]
The game according to appendix F1, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit status from being guessed or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. In addition, unlike the game machine according to appendix F3, there is no need to set the order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is to be controlled from among the plurality of information is simple. become.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F4, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. can enjoy.

[Appendix F6]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game to the start time of the value-adding game. The gaming machine according to appendix F5, characterized in that it is set to .

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set between the start time of the special game to be shifted to the start time of the value-giving game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first-hit special game and the start time of the value-adding game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so an opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each first win is guaranteed. .

[Appendix F7]
The end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E6, characterized in that

[Appendix F8]
The gaming machine according to appendix F7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to notes F7 and F8, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the jackpot game, the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. In this case, profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix F9]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix F8, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F9, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit where the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of consecutive game hits in which the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the second special game state If the predetermined period does not end between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, A predetermined period ends between the end of the value giving game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive games end and the end of the special game. be done. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that specific conditions will be met is higher for each consecutive villa than for one shot, and for each consecutive villa, the higher the number of times that specific conditions are met, the higher the possibility that the number of times that specific conditions will be met will increase. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the profit state becomes easier to guess or recognize.

[Appendix F10]
The profit information is performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) as an indicator of ball payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F9.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F10, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the ball payout performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball payout performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball payout performance, enjoy the game in the expectation that the ball payout performance will be recognizable, and continue the game based on the guessed ball payout performance or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix F11]
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the transition decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. further prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix F10, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F11, since the profit information includes information regarding the probability of advantageous judgment that greatly affects the ball-dispensing performance of the gaming machine, it is possible to estimate or recognize the probability of advantageous judgment, thereby improving the ball-dispensing performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the performance of putting out balls based on an index that more appropriately reflects the As a result, the player enjoys guessing the probability of advantageous decision, enjoys the game in the expectation that the probability of advantageous decision will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the result of guessing or recognizing the probability of advantageous decision. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix F12]
The gaming machine according to appendix F10 or appendix F11, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12, the performance information, which is the advantageous information, includes information indicating the ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winports. It is possible to infer or recognize performance information that indicates Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects variations in the winning performance of the winning openings among gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the gaming machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys estimating the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting to be able to recognize the ball payout performance based on the winning opening, and guesses the ball payout performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, based on the recognition result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game.

[Appendix F13]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when a game ball enters,
The performance information is sent to the first winning port (314) until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls, or until the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix F12, characterized in that it includes information about the number of unit determinations in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball in (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F13, the information on the number of unit judgments is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the number of unit judgments can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations, the player can guess or recognize the susceptibility to transition determination in the normal game state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game in anticipation of being able to recognize the number of unit judgments, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the number of unit judgments. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix F14]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
The performance information includes the number of game balls discharged to the game board (31), the number of game balls to enter the first winning port (314), and the general winning port (313). The gaming machine according to appendix F12, characterized in that it includes information on a ball payout ratio (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the game ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information on the pay-out rate, so it is possible to guess or recognize the information on the pay-out rate. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the likelihood of winning the first winning slot and the general winning slots. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout rate, enjoys the game in the expectation that the ball payout rate will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the guessed ball payout rate or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix F15]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix F12, characterized by including information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of incoming balls.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F15, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information regarding the consecutive character ratio, so that information regarding the consecutive character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes, and the number of payouts of game balls entering the variable winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the continuous role ratio, the player can determine the frequency of the transition determination result to shift to the special game (residence ratio in the special game state) and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by estimating the continuous role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the continuous role ratio will be recognizable, and play the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix F16]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game with the support of an electric role object. A second prize winning port (315) into which a ball can be entered and which gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the game ball in the special game state. a variable winning port (316);
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). It is characterized by including information on the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls for the entering ball and the number of paid out balls for the entering of the game ball to the second winning hole (315). The game machine according to appendix F12.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F16, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information about the character ratio, so it is possible to guess or recognize the information about the character ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information on the role ratio, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the support of the electric role It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the staying ratio of the receiving support game state (time-saving game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the role ratio will become recognizable, and continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix G1]
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
an operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
with
The display control means (51) is configured to display the profit information on the profit information display means (39, 341) when the player operates the operation means when the specific condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by controlling contents.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, when the player operates the operation means when a specific condition is satisfied, the display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled. Therefore, the player can obtain part or all of the profit information by operating the operation means when a specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the player is actively encouraged to participate in the game in order to display part or all of the profit information on the profit information display means, thereby improving the playability.

[Appendix G2]
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information,
A display area to be controlled by the display control means (51) can be selected from the plurality of display areas by operating the operation means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in appendix G1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2, the player can select a display area in which one of the plurality of information (part of the profit information) is to be displayed from among the plurality of display areas when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can guess the profit state by selecting the display area at his/her own discretion and obtaining part of the profit information. As a result, different information can be obtained by selecting a different display area each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the profit state can be estimated and enjoyed based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to appendix G2, wherein the specific condition is that the player predicts an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and that the player's prediction comes true.

[Appendix G4]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
production means (341) for executing production in the progress of the game;
further comprising
The special game includes a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player,
The event is a transition determination from when the result of the transition determination in the transition determination means (41) is to shift to a special game until the next result of the transition determination is to shift to a special game. A supplementary note characterized by including at least one of the number of times, the type of special game when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, and the type of effect executed by the effect means. A gaming machine described in G3.

In the gaming machines according to appendices G3 and G4, the player is allowed to predict events that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and if the player's prediction is correct as a specific condition, the player can change It is possible to enjoy whether or not the prediction is true in a game or a jackpot game. In addition, compared to the case where it is possible to passively guess or recognize profit information such as information on game setting values as the game progresses, the awareness of participation in the game improves and the process of guessing or recognizing profit information is improved. You can enjoy it even more.

[Appendix G5]
When the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied during the predetermined period is selected from the plurality of display areas by operating the operation means. The game machine according to any one of appendices G2 to G4, characterized in that it can be selected as a control target by means (51).

[Appendix G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G2 to G5, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machines according to notes G5 and G6, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within a predetermined period can be selected from a plurality of display areas by operating the operation means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times during a predetermined period, two or more pieces of information can be obtained by selecting the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times. As a result, it is possible to obtain two or more pieces of information in one predetermined period of time, so that it is possible to enjoy estimating the state of profit based on a combination of different pieces of information.

[Appendix G7]
The gaming machine according to attachments G1 to G6, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G7, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, whether the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. can enjoy

[Appendix G8]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game to the start time of the value-adding game. The gaming machine according to appendix G7, characterized in that it is set to .

In the gaming machine according to appendix G8, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set between the start time of the special game to be shifted to the start time of the value-giving game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first-hit special game and the start time of the value-adding game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so an opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each first win is guaranteed. .

[Appendix G9]
The end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G8, characterized in that

[Appendix G10]
The gaming machine according to appendix G9, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to notes G9 and G10, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the jackpot game, the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. In this case, profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix G11]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix G10, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G11, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit where the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of consecutive game hits in which the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the second special game state If the predetermined period does not end between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, A predetermined period ends between the end of the value giving game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive games end and the end of the special game. be done. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the profit state becomes easier to guess or recognize.

[Appendix G12]
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments G1 to G11, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G12, the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of estimating the profit information depending on which information among the plurality of information is to be displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix G13]
The gaming machine according to appendix G12, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G13, each of the plurality of display areas displays specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of information, so profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . As a result, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information out of a plurality of pieces of information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix G14]
G13, characterized in that the display control means (51) controls, among the plurality of display areas, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G14, display contents related to profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state from the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the player can enjoy the state of profit by estimating the profit state based on the contents displayed on the profit information display means. You can also enjoy whether it is satisfied or not. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix G15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G11 to G14, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G15, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the profit information display means for displaying the profit information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix G16]
The gaming machine according to appendix G15, wherein the profit information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G16, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to guess or recognize the profit information, and the process of guessing the profit information is simplified without requiring advanced knowledge. to enjoy.

[Appendix G17]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments G13 to G16, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G17, since the profit information display means can display a profit state image from which profit information can be recognized, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. This improves the playability of guessing or recognizing the profit state.

[Appendix G18]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Note G17, wherein the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix G18, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the ornamental pattern that notifies or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. As a result, the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix G19]
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, controls the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information. , is executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G19, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times in a predetermined period, control of display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information is performed in a predetermined order. executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the number and the order of which the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

[Appendix G20]
The gaming machine according to appendix G19, wherein the predetermined order is a predefined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G20, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period of time. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may have a different degree (importance) from which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit status or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, by specifying the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to add a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of guessing the profit information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix G21]
The display control means (51) selects from a plurality of order patterns defining the predetermined order according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, according to the order defined by the order pattern. , the gaming machine according to appendix G20, wherein the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G21, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of control target patterns selected from a plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. Here, for the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status by setting a large number of multiple order patterns or setting them to be easily selected because it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine during the game. In addition, by mixing a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state.

[Appendix G22]
The game according to appendix G18, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G22, when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of pieces of information, i.e., randomly selected information out of a plurality of pieces of information, is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit status from being guessed or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. In addition, unlike the game machine according to appendix G21, there is no need to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select information whose display is to be controlled from among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. become.

[Appendix G23]
The profit information is performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) as an indicator of ball payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G22.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G23, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the ball putting performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball putting performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball payout performance, enjoy the game in the expectation that the ball payout performance will be recognizable, and continue the game based on the guessed ball payout performance or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix G24]
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the transition decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. further prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix G23, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G24, since the profit information includes information relating to the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the ball output performance of the gaming machine, it is possible to estimate or recognize the probability of advantageous determination, thereby improving the ball output performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the performance of putting out balls based on an index that more appropriately reflects the As a result, the player enjoys guessing the probability of advantageous decision, enjoys the game in the expectation that the probability of advantageous decision will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the result of guessing or recognizing the probability of advantageous decision. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix G25]
The gaming machine according to appendix G23 or appendix G24, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G25, the performance information, which is advantageous information, includes information indicating the ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winports, so that the player can determine the ball payout performance based on the winport. It is possible to infer or recognize performance information that indicates Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance of the winning openings among the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the gaming machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting to be able to recognize the ball payout performance based on the winning opening, and guesses the ball payout performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, based on the recognition result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game.

[Appendix G26]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when a game ball enters,
The performance information is sent to the first winning port (314) until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls, or until the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix G25, further comprising information on the number of unit determinations in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball in (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G26, the information on the number of unit judgments is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the number of unit judgments can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations, the player can guess or recognize the susceptibility to transition determination in the normal game state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game in anticipation of being able to recognize the number of unit judgments, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the number of unit judgments. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix G27]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
The performance information includes the number of game balls discharged to the game board (31), the number of game balls to enter the first winning port (314), and the general winning port (313). The gaming machine according to appendix G25, characterized in that it includes information on a ball payout ratio (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the game ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G27, the performance information includes information on the pay-out rate as the performance information, which is advantageous information, so the information on the pay-out rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the likelihood of winning the first winning slot and the general winning slots. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout rate, enjoys the game in the expectation that the ball payout rate will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the guessed ball payout rate or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix G28]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix G25, characterized by including information on a continuous role ratio, which is a ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of incoming balls.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G28, the performance information includes information about the continuous character ratio as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information about the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes, and the number of payouts of game balls entering the variable winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the continuous role ratio, the player can determine the frequency of the transition determination result to shift to the special game (residence ratio in the special game state) and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by estimating the continuous role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the continuous role ratio will be recognizable, and play the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix G29]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game with the support of an electric role object. A second prize winning port (315) into which a ball can be entered and which gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the game ball in the special game state. a variable winning port (316);
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). It is characterized by including information on the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls for the entering ball and the number of paid out balls for the entering of the game ball to the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix G25.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G29, the performance information includes information about the character ratio as the performance information, which is advantageous information, so that the information about the character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information on the role ratio, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the support of the electric role It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the staying ratio of the receiving support game state (time-saving game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the role ratio will become recognizable, and continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix H1]
a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls;
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A second discharge port (373) and a third discharge port (378) for discharging game balls that can be entered in the special game and flow down the game area to the back side of the game board;
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times that the game ball is detected to have entered the second outlet (373) by the detection means (341) during a predetermined period. display control means (51) for controlling the display content of the profit information;
with
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which game balls are allowed to enter in the special game,
Game balls entered into the variable winning port (316) are distributed to either the second discharge port (373), the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378). A gaming machine characterized by further comprising a sorting means (37).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, since game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, it is determined by the distribution means whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port. The playability of depending on the sorting of game balls is imparted. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix H2]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The first winning hole (314) can enter a game ball hit to the left side area of the game board (31),
The game machine according to appendix H1, wherein the variable winning hole (316) allows a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2, since the game ball launched to the left side area of the game board can enter the first winning hole, it is necessary to hit the left hand in order to receive the transition to the special game. There is On the other hand, since the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board can enter the variable winning hole, it is necessary to hit right in the special game. Then, the distribution means can distribute the game balls hit to the right side area of the game board to the second discharge port. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state in the game for receiving the transition to the special game, but it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in the special game. In this way, since it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state when hitting right in a special game, etc., it is possible to give motivation to continue the game until the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix H3]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1 or appendix H2, wherein the second outlet (373) is more difficult to enter than the third outlet (378).

[Appendix H4]
The gaming machine according to appendix H3, wherein the second discharge port (373) is provided above the third discharge port (378).

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to appendix H3 or appendix H4, wherein the second outlet (373) has an opening area smaller than that of the third outlet (378).

In the gaming machines according to notes H3 to H5, it is difficult for game balls to enter the second outlet compared to the third outlet, so it is difficult to satisfy specific conditions, and it is easy to guess or grasp the profit state. is not. Therefore, when the player's profit status is low, for example, when the probability of advantageous judgment is low, the player can easily understand that the probability of advantageous judgment is low, and the game on the gaming machine is stopped early. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of incidents.

[Appendix H6]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H5, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. can enjoy

[Appendix H7]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game to the start time of the value-adding game. The gaming machine according to appendix H6, characterized in that it is set to .

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set between the start time of the special game to be shifted to the start time of the value-giving game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first-hit special game and the start time of the value-adding game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so an opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each first win is guaranteed. .

[Appendix H8]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H7, characterized in that

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to appendix H8, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to notes H8 and H9, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the jackpot game, the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. In this case, profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix H10]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix H9, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit where the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of consecutive game hits in which the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the second special game state If the predetermined period does not end between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, A predetermined period ends between the end of the value giving game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive games end and the end of the special game. be done. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the profit state becomes easier to guess or recognize.

[Appendix H11]
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments H1 to H10, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11, the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of estimating the profit information depending on which information among the plurality of information is to be displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix H12]
The gaming machine according to appendix H11, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H12, each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding specific information among the plurality of pieces of information, so profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence. . As a result, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information out of a plurality of pieces of information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix H13]
The display control means (51) controls, among the plurality of display areas, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in H12.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H13, the display content regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state from the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the player can enjoy the state of profit by estimating the profit state based on the contents displayed on the profit information display means. You can also enjoy whether it is satisfied or not. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments H11 to H13, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H14, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the profit information display means for displaying the profit information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix H15]
The gaming machine according to attachment H13, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H15, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, profit information can be displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to guess or recognize the profit information, and the process of guessing the profit information is simplified without requiring advanced knowledge. to enjoy.

[Appendix H16]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H13, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

Since the gaming machine according to appendix H16 can display a profit state image from which profit information can be recognized on the profit information display means, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. This improves the playability of guessing or recognizing the profit state.

[Appendix H17]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Note H16, wherein the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix H17, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of decorative symbols that informs or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. As a result, the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix H18]
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, controls the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information. , is executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H18, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times within a predetermined period of time, display control of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information is performed in a predetermined order. executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the number and the order of which the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

[Appendix H19]
The gaming machine according to appendix H18, wherein the predetermined order is a predefined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H19, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may have a different degree (importance) from which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit status or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, by specifying the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to add a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of guessing the profit information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H20]
The display control means (51) selects from a plurality of order patterns defining the predetermined order according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, according to the order defined by the order pattern. , the gaming machine according to appendix H19, wherein the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H20, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of control target patterns selected from a plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. Here, for the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status by setting a large number of multiple order patterns or setting them to be easily selected because it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine during the game. In addition, by mixing a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state.

[Appendix H21]
The game according to appendix H18, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H21, when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of pieces of information, that is, randomly selected information out of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit status from being guessed or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. In addition, unlike the game machine according to appendix H20, there is no need to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select information whose display is to be controlled from among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. become.

[Appendix H22]
The profit information is performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) as an indicator of ball payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to H21.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H22, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an indicator of the ball putting performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball putting performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball payout performance, enjoy the game in the expectation that the ball payout performance will be recognizable, and continue the game based on the guessed ball payout performance or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix H23]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the transition decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. further prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix H22, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H23, since the profit information includes information about the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the ball-dispensing performance of the gaming machine, it is possible to estimate or recognize the probability of advantageous determination, thereby improving the ball-dispensing performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the performance of putting out balls based on an index that more appropriately reflects the As a result, the player enjoys guessing the probability of advantageous decision, enjoys the game in the expectation that the probability of advantageous decision will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the result of guessing or recognizing the probability of advantageous decision. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix H24]
The gaming machine according to appendix H22 or appendix H23, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize-winning holes (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H24, the performance information, which is advantageous information, includes information indicating the ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winports. It is possible to infer or recognize performance information that indicates Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance of the winning openings among the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the gaming machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting to be able to recognize the ball payout performance based on the winning opening, and guesses the ball payout performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, based on the recognition result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game.

[Appendix H25]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when a game ball enters,
The performance information is sent to the first winning port (314) until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls, or until the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix H24, characterized in that it includes information about the number of unit determinations in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball in (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H25, the information on the number of unit judgments is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, so that the information on the number of unit judgments can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations, the player can guess or recognize the susceptibility to transition determination in the normal game state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game in anticipation of being able to recognize the number of unit judgments, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the number of unit judgments. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix H26]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
The performance information includes the number of game balls discharged to the game board (31), the number of game balls to enter the first winning port (314), and the general winning port (313). A gaming machine according to appendix H24, characterized in that it includes information on a ball payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the game ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H26, as the performance information, which is advantageous information, the performance information includes information on the pay-out rate, so the information on the pay-out rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the likelihood of winning the first winning slot and the general winning slots. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout rate, enjoys the game in the expectation that the ball payout rate will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the guessed ball payout rate or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix H27]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix H24, characterized in that it includes information on a continuous accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of incoming balls.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H27, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information regarding the consecutive character ratio, so that the information regarding the consecutive character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes, and the number of payouts of game balls entering the variable winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the continuous role ratio, the player can determine the frequency of the transition determination result to shift to the special game (residence ratio in the special game state) and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by estimating the continuous role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the continuous role ratio will be recognizable, and play the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix H28]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game with the support of an electric role object. A second prize winning port (315) into which a ball can be entered and which gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the game ball in the special game state. a variable winning port (316);
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). It is characterized by including information on the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls for the entering ball and the number of paid out balls for the entering of the game ball to the second winning hole (315). The game machine according to appendix H24.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H28, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information about the character ratio, so it is possible to guess or recognize the information about the character ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information on the role ratio, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the support of the electric role It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the staying ratio of the receiving support game state (time-saving game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the role ratio will become recognizable, and continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix I1]
Profit information related to the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball output value, latent probability change, demotion to low probability mode etc.), and profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period;
retention means (38) for retaining the game ball that has passed through the specific area (373) during the predetermined period and releasing the game ball after the predetermined period;
with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through the specific area,
The display control means (51) controls the profit information to be displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) after the predetermined period of time according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period of time. A game machine characterized by controlling display contents.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, the specific condition can be established when the specific area is passed, so the player can easily grasp that the specific condition has been met. This allows for more fun as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, the display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, the display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period are controlled. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the profit information by the display contents (part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. As a result, the player can enjoy the game in anticipation of what content will be displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix I2]
The staying means (38) is a movable member (383) movable between a first position (upper limit position) that restricts the movement of the game ball and a second position (lower limit position) that allows the movement of the game ball. with
The gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the movable member (383) is at the first position at least at the start of the predetermined period, and is at the second position at the end of the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I2, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball is retained in the retaining means and a state in which the game ball is not retained by the simple configuration and control of moving the movable member.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine according to appendix I1 or appendix I2, wherein the game ball retained in the retaining means (38) is visible.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I3, since the game balls retained in the retention means are visible, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls retained in the retention means (number of specific conditions satisfied). . Therefore, when the player confirms, for example, that the number of game balls equal to or greater than the upper limit has been retained in the retention means, the player is advised in advance that the profit information at the final stage, in which the profit state can be recognized, will be displayed on the profit information display means. I can grasp it. In addition, even if the number of game balls below the upper limit is retained in the retaining means, the profit is determined based on the content displayed on the profit information display means (part of the profit information) in consideration of the number of visually recognized game balls. state can be inferred. As a result, the probability of estimating the profit state increases and the enjoyment of estimating the profit state also increases, so that the playability is further improved.

[Appendix I4]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I3, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I4, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, whether the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. can enjoy.

[Appendix I5]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game to the start time of the value-adding game. The gaming machine according to appendix I4, characterized in that it is set to .

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I5, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game state. It is set between the start time of the special game to be shifted to the start time of the value-giving game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first-hit special game and the start time of the value-adding game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so an opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each first win is guaranteed. .

[Appendix I6]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable winning port (316) is opened and closed to give a game value to the player,
The end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the start of the variable game in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I5, characterized in that

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I6, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to additions I6 and I7, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the jackpot game, the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. In this case, profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display the profit information on the profit information display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix I8]
The special game state is a first special game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game state ends ( 5R normal jackpot game state) and after the end of the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the transition determination Including a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix I7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game in the first special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I8, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value adding game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit where the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state A predetermined period ends between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of consecutive game hits in which the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the second special game state If the predetermined period does not end between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, A predetermined period ends between the end of the value giving game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-giving game in the first special game where the consecutive games end and the end of the special game. be done. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the profit state becomes easier to guess or recognize.

[Appendix I9]
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments I1 to I8, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I9, the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of estimating the profit information depending on which information among the plurality of information is to be displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine according to appendix I9, wherein specific information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I10, each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding specific information among the plurality of pieces of information, so profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence. . As a result, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information out of a plurality of pieces of information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix I11]
Supplementary note I9 or, wherein the display control means (51) controls, among the plurality of display areas, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times the special condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix I10.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I11, the display content of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state from the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in a predetermined period, and the player can enjoy the state of profit by estimating the profit state based on the contents displayed on the profit information display means. You can also enjoy whether it is satisfied or not. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated, the playability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game.

[Appendix I12]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments I9 to I11, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I12, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the profit information display means for displaying the profit information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix I13]
The gaming machine according to attachment I12, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I13, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, part or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to guess or recognize the profit information, and the process of guessing the profit information is simplified without requiring advanced knowledge. to enjoy.

[Appendix I14]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments I9 to I11, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I14, since the profit state image from which profit information can be recognized can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many options for the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the mode of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. This improves the playability of guessing or recognizing the profit state.

[Appendix I15]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Supplementary note I14, wherein the profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to Addendum I15, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of decorative symbols that informs or suggests the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. As a result, the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix I16]
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, controls the display of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information. , is executed in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I16, when a specific condition is satisfied multiple times within a predetermined period of time, display control of the number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of pieces of information is performed in a predetermined order. executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the profit state based on the number and the order of which the display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

[Appendix I17]
The gaming machine according to appendix I16, wherein the predetermined order is a predefined order.

In the gaming machine according to Addendum I17, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period of time. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may have a different degree (importance) from which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit status or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, by specifying the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to add a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of guessing the profit information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix I18]
The display control means (51) selects from a plurality of order patterns defining the predetermined order according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, according to the order defined by the order pattern. , the gaming machine according to appendix I17, wherein the display of the plurality of information is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Addendum I18, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of control target patterns selected from a plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. Here, for the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit status by setting a large number of multiple order patterns or setting them to be easily selected because it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine during the game. In addition, by mixing a plurality of order patterns that make it easy to guess or recognize the profit state and a plurality of order patterns that make it difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state.

[Appendix I9]
The game according to appendix I16, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I19, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from among the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit status from being guessed or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled. In addition, unlike the game machine according to Supplementary Note I18, there is no need to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control required to select information whose display is to be controlled from among a plurality of information is simple. become.

[Appendix I20]
The profit information is performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, expected ball payout value, etc.) as an indicator of ball payout performance. The gaming machine according to any one of I1 to Appendix I19.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Supplementary Note I20, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an indicator of the ball putting performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball putting performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball payout performance, enjoy the game in the expectation that the ball payout performance will be recognizable, and continue the game based on the guessed ball payout performance or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix I21]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) further comprising
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the transition decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. further prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix I20, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine pertaining to Supplementary Note I21, since the profit information includes information relating to the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the ball output performance of the gaming machine, it is possible to estimate or recognize the probability of advantageous determination, thereby improving the ball output performance of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the performance of putting out balls based on an index that more appropriately reflects the As a result, the player enjoys guessing the probability of advantageous decision, enjoys the game in the expectation that the probability of advantageous decision will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the result of guessing or recognizing the probability of advantageous decision. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix I22]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note I20 or supplementary note I21, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I22, the performance information, which is advantageous information, includes information indicating the ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winports. It is possible to infer or recognize performance information that indicates Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball payout performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance of the winning openings among the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in the manufacturing of the gaming machines and changes over time. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, enjoys the game while expecting to be able to recognize the ball payout performance based on the winning opening, and guesses the ball payout performance based on the winning opening. Alternatively, based on the recognition result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to continue the game.

[Appendix I23]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when a game ball enters,
The performance information is sent to the first winning port (314) until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls, or until the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix I22, characterized by including information about the number of unit determinations in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the entry of the game ball in (1).

In the gaming machine pertaining to Addendum I23, since the information regarding the number of unit determinations is included as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the information regarding the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations, the player can guess or recognize the susceptibility to transition determination in the normal game state. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game in anticipation of being able to recognize the number of unit judgments, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the number of unit judgments. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix I24]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
The performance information includes the number of game balls discharged to the game board (31), the number of game balls to enter the first winning port (314), and the general winning port (313). The gaming machine according to Appendix I22, characterized by including information on a ball payout ratio (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the game ball.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Addendum I24, the performance information includes information on the pay-out rate as the performance information, which is advantageous information, so that the information on the pay-out rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize the information about the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the likelihood of winning the first winning slot and the general winning slots. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout rate, enjoys the game in the expectation that the ball payout rate will become recognizable, and continues the game based on the guessed ball payout rate or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

[Appendix I25]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to attachment I22, characterized by including information on a continuous role ratio, which is a ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of incoming balls.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Addendum I25, the performance information includes information on the consecutive character ratio as the performance information that is the advantageous information, so it is possible to guess or recognize the information on the consecutive character ratio. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes, and the number of payouts of game balls entering the variable winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate). Therefore, by being able to guess or recognize information about the continuous role ratio, the player can determine the frequency of the transition determination result to shift to the special game (residence ratio in the special game state) and the variable winning opening It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by estimating the continuous role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the continuous role ratio will be recognizable, and play the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether to continue or not.

[Appendix I26]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game with the support of an electric role object. A second prize winning port (315) into which a ball can be entered and which gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball, and a game ball entering the game ball in the special game state. a variable winning port (316);
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). It is characterized by including information on the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls for the entering ball and the number of paid out balls for the entering of the game ball to the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix I22.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Addendum I26, as the performance information, which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information regarding the character ratio, so it is possible to guess or recognize the information regarding the character ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information on the role ratio, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the support of the electric role It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the staying ratio of the receiving support game state (time-saving game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the role ratio, enjoy the game in the expectation that the role ratio will become recognizable, and continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the role ratio. It becomes possible to judge whether or not

10: Gaming Machine 313: General Winning Port 314: First Winning Port 315: Second Winning Port 316: Variable Winning Port 341: Symbol Display Unit 37: Creon Device 37
373: Special out ball mouth 38: Game ball retention part 391: Retention lane 393: Stopper part 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display part 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
47: ROM
5: Audio lamp controller 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

profit information display means capable of displaying profit information relating to the profit state of the player as the game progresses;
display control means for controlling display contents of the profit information displayed on the profit information display means according to the number of times a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period;
with
the profit information includes a plurality of pieces of information necessary to recognize the profit information;
The gaming machine, wherein the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

Images